MAXIMA 2007 - Berline NISSAN - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free MAXIMA 2007 NISSAN in PDF.

View the manual :

Table of contents Click a title to go to the page

Manual assistant

Waiting for your message

Product information

Brand : NISSAN

Model : MAXIMA 2007

Category : Berline

Download the PDF manual Print

Download the instructions for your Berline in PDF format for free! Find your manual MAXIMA 2007 - NISSAN and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. MAXIMA 2007 by NISSAN.

USER MANUAL MAXIMA 2007 NISSAN

FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under- stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov- ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” explains details about ma ing and servicing your ve- hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Own- er's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, as- sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

A WARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE- MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for you and your passengers!

+ NEVER drive under the influence of al- cohol or drugs.

ALWAYS observe posted EE its and never drive too fast for conditions.

ALWAYS give your full attention to dri ing and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro- priate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.

ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.

° ALWAYS review this Owners Manual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or per- formance problems resulting from modi- fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with- out obligation

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

A WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

À CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder- ate personal injury or damage to your ve- hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro- cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

H you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING A WARNING Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de- fects or other reproductive harm. In addi- tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter- ies, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Perchlor- ate Material — special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.”

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. GBluetooth U.S.A. and licensed to Xanavi Informatics Corporation.

Al rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Con- sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For US. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information

— Your name, address, and telephone number

— Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the drivers side)

— Date of purchase — Current odometer reading

— Your NISSAN dealer's name — Your comments or questions

oR You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For US. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.0. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints … Exterior front Exterior rar... Passenger compartment

0-2 Instrument panel..… 0-3 Engine compartment check locations

0-4 Warning/indicator lights … ..0-5

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-21)

Rear head restraint (P. 1-8)

Rear seat belts (P. 1-10)

Supplemental curtain side-impact air

5. Supplemental side impact air bags (P. 1-37)

6. Front head restraint (P. 1-8, P. 1-9)

7... Front seat belts (P. 1-10)

8. Supplemental front impact air bags (P. 1-37)

10. Occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) (P.1-44)

11. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-50)

12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) (P. 1-20)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Engine hood (P. 3-18)

Headlight and turn signal switch (P.2-21)

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29) Windshield wiper and washer switch (P.2-19)

Windshield (P. 8-19)

Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-39) Power windows (P. 2-37)

Tire pressure (P. 8-82)

… Tire chains (P. 8-40)

Comering light (P. 2-26) Fog light switch (P. 2-25)

… Tie down hooks (P. 6-12)

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

EXTERIOR REAR Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-20) Rear sun shade (if so equipped) (P.2-41) Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-20) Trunk lid (P. 3-18) Vehicle loading (P. 9-12) Tie-down hook (P. 6-12) Exterior trunk lid release/request button (P.3-12) Rear sonar system (P. 5-22) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29) 0. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation (P. 3-21, P. 9-3) 11. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-20) 12. Child safety locks (P. 3-6) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT LiI0069

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror (P.3-25)

Sun visors (P. 8-24)

Interior lights, iluminated entry (P. 2-42) Front seat (P. 1-2)

Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-89) Rear console (P. 2-85)

Rear cup holders (P. 2-82)

Front console (P. 2-34)

… Front cup holders (P. 2-32)

Park brake, parking on hills (P.5-13, P.5-17) HomeLink® (P. 2-44)

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Side and center ventilators (P. 4-18) Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch (P.2-21)

Steering wheel switch for audio control and Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem (if so equipped) (P. 4-42, 4-43)

Illustrated table of contents

Meters and gauges (P. 2-8)

Driver supplemental air bag/hom (P. 1-87, P.2-27)

Security indicator light (P. 2-16)

9. Display screen/Navigation system* (P.4-2, P.4-6)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-37)

12. Glove box (P. 2-34)

18. Audio system controls (P. 4-22)

14. Climate controls (P. 4-10)

15. Storage (P. 2-31)

(if so equipped) (P. 2-29)

4. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-26)

5. Instrument brighiness control (P. 2-25)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er's Manual (ff so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS 1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11) 2. Engine oil filer cap (P. 8-8) 3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) 4. Air cleaner (P. 8-16) 5. Battery (P. 8-13) 6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21) 7... Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8) 8. Radiator cap (P. 8-7) 9. Drive belt location (P.8-14) 10. Fuse block (P. 8-21) 11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir (P.8-12) 12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7) NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page light light light Anti-lock Braking 2-10 (D Low tire pressure 2-11 CVT Continuously Vari- 2-13 System (ABS) warning light dr ranamssion indicator light warning light & Low windshield 2-12 am 9 washer fluid warning D Continuously Vari- 2-13 Brake waminglight_ | 2-10 light able Transmission (CVT) position indi- H P position selecting 2-12 cator light SH warning light cRuISE| | CRUISE main 2-13 A Seat belt warning 2-13 switch indicator light Charge warning 2-10 light and chime light Cruise SET switch 2-14 9 Supplemental air 2-13 SET indicator light Door open waming | 2-10 bag warning light light Re. Front passenger air 2-14 PP Trunk lid open 2-13 A2 bag status light Engine oil pressure | 2-11 warning light waming light Ê High beam indicator | 2-14 — light (blue) Intelligent Key 2-11 system warning light UE | Malunction 2-14 SOON indicator light (MIL) Low fuel warning 2-11 light SLIP Slip indicator light 2-15 (if so equipped)

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Indicator Name Page light as Traction control 2-15 (2) system off indicator light (if so equipped) = =) Turn signal/hazard 2-15 indicator lights VDC Vehicle dynamic 2-15 control of indicator

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats … RE | Front manual seat adiusment- - passenger's side 1-2

Front power seat adjustment for drivers seat and if so equipped' for passenger's seat) . = . Folding rear seat (f so equipped). Head restraint adjustment .…… Active Head Restraint (front seats) . Seat belts . Precautions on seat bel usage Child safety. Pregnant women Injured persons. Three-point type seat bel with retractor. Seat belt extenders eee Seat belt maintenance

SNSRRBDOOWDOR Child restraints. Precautions on child restraints Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) … .

Top tether strap child restraint . Child restraint installation using LATCH . Child restraint installation using the seat

belts . DRE Booster seats.

Precautions on booster s seats . Booster seat installation.

Supplemental restraint system Precautions on supplemental restraint system.

Supplemental air bag waming labels. Supplemental air bag warning light …

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

SEATS Sit upright and well back.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT SIDE ARS1152|

e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. See “Precau- tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this section.

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ADJUSTMENT — PASSENGER'S

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for driver's seat and if so equipped for passenger's seat)

e The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.

e Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)" in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto- matic drive positioner operation.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Move the recline switch backward until the de- sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage" later in this section). Also, the seatback can be re- clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve- hicle is stopped.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

RL NE WRS0164 LRS0239 LRSO238

Seat lifter (driver's seat) Manual Power Push the front or rear end of the switch up or LUMbar Support (driver's seat) down to adjust the angle and height of the seat The lumbar support feature provides lower back cushion. support to the driver. Move the lever up or down (manual) or move the switch forward or backward (power) to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so equipped) Interior trunk access

For models without rear center console, the trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown.

@ Push down on the button on the rear parcel shelf.

@ Fold down the passenger side seatback.

+ Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat whenit is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci- dent or sudden stop.

e The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

«+ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or Shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- lision, unsecured cargo could cause

g the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi- tion. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop.

e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear Seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reach through the opening and pull on the strap @ located behind the seat.

The rear seats can be locked using the mechani- cal key to prevent unauthorized access.

For models with rear center console, the trunk can be accessed through the access panel be- tween the rear seats.

The panel can be locked using the mechanical key to prevent unauthorized access. For more information on keys, refer to "Keys” in the Pre- driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual

Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

A WARNING Head restraints should be adjusted prop- erly as they may provide significant pro- tection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat.

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front seats)

e Always adjust the head restraints prop- erly as specified in this section. Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the Active Head Restraint.

+ Active Head Restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems. Al- ways wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident.

e Do not attach anything to the head re- straint stalks. Doing so could impair Active Head Restraint function.

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz- ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in à rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occu- pant's head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as described earlier in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

SEAT BELTS Sit upright and well back.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE I you are wearing your seat belt properly ad- justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supple- mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

7 / / Sit upright and wel SSS0134 SSS0016|

A WARNING A WARNING Every person who drives or rides in this e The seat belt should be properly ad- vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may times. Children should be properly re- reduce the effectiveness of the entire strained in the rear seat and, if appro- restraint system and increase the priate, in a child restraint. chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

e Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too increase the risk of internal an accident.

Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.

Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.

Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.

Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.

The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats.

If the seat belt warning light glows con- tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- function in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer.

Removal and installation of the pre- tensioner seat belt system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e All seat belt assemblies, including re- tractors and attaching hardware, Should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom- mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un- less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

e All child restraints and attaching hard- ware should be inspected after any col- lision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

There are three basic types of child restraint systems:

The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child re- straints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a front facing child restraint.

A WARNING Infants and children need special protec- tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

AI U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri- tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re- straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for additional protec- tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. According to accident stat s, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” later in this section.

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- facturer's instructions for installation and use.

Children that are over one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recom- mends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches (142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). À booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat bel fit

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoul- der belt in the child's seating position fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle por- tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. À booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

have a label certifying that it complies with Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

A WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as pos- sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR A WARNING

« Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.

e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Manual front seat shown Fastening the seat belts

@ Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this section.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna)

@ Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

e_ Theretractoris designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

e Ifthe seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

@ Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have a locking mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode or child restraint mode.

When the ALR is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Once retracted, the seat belt is in the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode. See “Child re- straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR should be used only for child re- Straint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten- sion. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

A WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely se- cured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Unfastening the seat belts

@ Tounfasten the seat bel, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically re- tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:

When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor.

+ When the vehicle slows down rapid

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows.

I the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Shoulder belt height adjustment (Front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad- justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau- tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.) To adjust, pull out the adjustment button D and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position (@), so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul- der belt anchor into position.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e After adjustment, release the adjust- ment button and try to move the shoul- der belt anchor up and down to make sure securely fixed in position.

e The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effec- tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

ff, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex- tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance if an extender is required.

e Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.

e Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

+ Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud- den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

e_ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom- mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e_ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

e Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt as- sembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS A WARNING

e Infants and small children should al- ways be place an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can re- sult in serious injury or death.

+ Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An flating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear- facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

NISSAN recommends that the child re- straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac- cording to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a front facing child re- straint in the front seat, see “Child re- straint installation using the seat belts” later in this section.

Improper use or improper installation of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident.

Follow all of the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child re- straint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being in- jured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.

Child restraint anchor points are de- igned to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- tioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible.

After attaching the child rest: before you place the child from side to side while hol near the LATCH attachment or by the seat belt path. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the re- straint in place. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If the restr: is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

e When your child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH System or a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

A CAUTION Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System or LATCH. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH)" later in this section

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See “Child restraint installation using the seat belts” later in this section. In general, child restraints are also designed to be installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind.

e_ Choose onlyarestraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

e_ Checkthe childrestraintin your vehicle tobe sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

e_lfthe child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.

AII USS. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

LATCH system anchor locations

LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS FOR CHILDREN SYSTEM (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compat- ible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating posi- tions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor location LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear ofthe seat cushion near the seatback. A label is at- tached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH anchors.

e Attach LATCH compatible child re- straints only at the locations shown in the illustration. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

e Child restraint anchor points are de- igned to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys- tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat bel to secure the child restraint. Check your child re- straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the in- structions provided by the child restraint manu- facturer.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment LATCH child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child restraint” later in this section for installation in- structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint, See “Child restraint installation using LATCH'in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT Ifthe manufacturer of your child restraint requires: the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to the anchor point.

A WARNING Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

5-passenger models Top Tether Anchor Point Locations

Anchor points are located on the rear parcel

4-passenger models Installing top tether strap

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt or LATCH (rear outboard seat positions only), as applicable.

1. Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat.

2. Remove the head restraint. Store it in a secure location.

3. Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor bracket that provides the straightest instal- lation.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de- tails.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH A WARNING

e Attach LATCH compatible child re- straints only at the locations shown. For the LATCH lower anchor locations, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil- dren System (LATCH)” in this section. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

The LATCH anchors are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cush- ion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH an- chors are obstructed.

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child restraint using LATCH:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. AI- ways follow the child restraint manufactur- er's instructions.

Front facing web-mounted -— step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat back.

H necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front facing rigid-mounted -— step 2

interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child re- straint.

Front facing — step 4

4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attach- ments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

5. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. See “Top tether strap child restraint" in this section.

Front facing — step 6

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint, hold the child restraint near the LATCH at- tachment and use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward 40 make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the anchor attachments to further tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to properly secure the restraint, move the re- Straint to another seating position and try again, or try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 6.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using LATCH System:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. AI- ways follow the child restraint manufactur- er's instructions.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Rear facing web-mounted — step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

Rear facing rigid-mounted -— step 2

For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attach- ments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear facing -— step 3

4. Before placing the child inthe child restraint, hold the child restraint near the LATCH at- tachment and use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. I should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the anchor attachments to further tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to properly secure the restraint, move the re- straint to another seating position and try again, or try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Rear facing — step 4 5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 4.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS A WARNING

e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental front air bags flate with great force. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental front air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

° NISSAN recommends that child re- straints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front pas- senger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. Also, be sure the front passenger air bag status light

illuminated to indicate the passenger

air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this sec- tion for details.

The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the retractor’s locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The re- straint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front pas- senger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

A child restraint with a top tether strap Should not be used in the front passen- ger seat.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint.

The instructions in this section apply to child restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seat or the front passenger seat

WRS0699 Front-facing (front passenger seat) - step 1 Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restr: the front seat, it should be placed front-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

À child restraint can only be installed in the rear center position of 5-passenger models. Do not attempt to install a child restraint on the rear console of the 4-passenger model

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. AI- ways follow the child restraint manufactur- er's instructions

The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust- ment” in this section.

I the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head re- straint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or à dif- ferent child restraint.

Front facing — step 3 3. Route the seat bel tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's in- Structions for belt routing

Front facing — step 4 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child re- straint mode). lt reverts to emergency lock- ing mode when the seat belt is fully re- tracted.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front facing - step 5 5. Allow the seat bel to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Front facing — step 6 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

Front facing — step 7

7. Wthe child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). See “Top tether strap child restraint” in this section: Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap to seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Before placing the child in the child restraint, hold the child restraint near the seat belt path and use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to another seating position and try again, or try a differ- ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 8.

Front facing — step 11

11. Ifthe child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light % should illuminate. H this light is not illuminated see "Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode child restraint mode) is canceled.

Rear-facing -— step 1 Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats:

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. À child restraint can only be installed in the rear center position of 5-passenger models. Do not attempt to install a child restraint on the rear console of the 4-passenger model. Position the child re- straint on the seat. Always follow the re- straint manufacturer's instructions.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Rear facing -— step 2 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's in- Structions for belt routing

Rear facing - step 3

. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child re- straint mode). lt reverts to emergency lock- ing mode when the seat belt is fully re- tracted.

Rear facing - step 4 4. Allow the seat bel to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Rear facing - step 5 5. Remove any additional slack from the child restraint: press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seat- back while pulling up on the seat belt.

Rear facing -— step 6

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint, hold the child restraint near the seat belt path and use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). fit does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to another rear seating position and try again, or try a different child restraint. Not all child re- straints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode

8. Check to make sure thatthe child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode child restraint mode) is canceled.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

BOOSTER SEATS ARS1098

© Infants and small children should al- ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint or booster seat can result in serious injury or death.

Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resistthe forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the Same seat belt around both your child and yourself.

NISSAN recommends that the booster seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac- cording to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, see “Booster seat installa- tion” in this section.

A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a three-point type seat belt with a booster seat can result in a serious jury in sudden stop or collision.

Improper use or improper installation of a booster seat can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Do not use towels, books, pillows or other items in place of a booster seat. Items such as these may move during normal driving or a collision and result in serious injury or death. Booster seats are designed to be used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de- signed to properly route the lap and Shoulder portions of the seat belt over the strongest portions of a child’s body to provide the maximum protection dur-

Follow all of the booster seat manufac- turers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a booster seat, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of booster seats in your vehicle.

If the booster seat and seat belt is not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.

e Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- tioned to fit the booster seat, but as upright as possible.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e After placing the child in the booster seat and fastening the seat belt, make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the abdomen.

e Do not put the shoulder belt behind the child or under the child’s arm. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, see “Booster seat installation” later in this section.

e When your booster seat is not in use, keep it secured with a seat belt to vent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

ACAUTION Remember that a booster seat left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the booster seat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

Choose only a booster seat with à label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

e_ Checkthe booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

Make sure the child's head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seat back must be at or above the center of the child's ears. For example, if a

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

low back booster seat (D) is chosen, the vehicle seat back must be at or above the center of the child's ears. I the seat back is lower than the center of the child's ears, a high back booster seat (2) should be used.

If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended pro- cedures.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

AII U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION A WARNING

® NISSAN recommends that booster seats be installed in the rear seat. How- ever, if you must install a booster seat in the front passenger seat, move the pas- senger’s seat to the rearmost position.

e The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint.

A CAUTION Do not use the lap/shoulder belt auto- matic locking retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0699 Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rear- most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions.

Rear center position (for 5-passenger mod- els only)

Rear outboard position

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces- sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pullthe shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the belt routing.

6. Follow the wamings, cautions and instruc- tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in the “Three-point seat belt with retractor” earlier in this section.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Front passenger position

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light %3 may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- tion contains important information conceming the driver and passenger supplemental front air bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System), supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system: The NISSAN advanced air bag system can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The front seat side-impact supplemental side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the im- pact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

These supplemental restraint systems are de- signed to supplement the crash protection pro- vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occu- pant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish- ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only when the tion switch is in the ON or START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Sit upright and well back.

e The supplemental front air bags ordi- will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

e The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light i: if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

e The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate great force. Even with the NISSAN A vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre- strained, leaning forward, sitting side- ways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front bag if you are up against it whenitinflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi- cal from the steering wheel or instru- ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The advanced air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us- age then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci- dent. See “Front Passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

+ Keep hands on the outside of the steer- ing wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

A WARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bags, side air bags or curtain side- impact air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil- dren should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-f: g child restraint in the front seat. An in- flating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for details.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Do not lean against the door.

Do not lean against the door. SSS0188]

A WARNING Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag:

e The supplemental side air bag and cur- tain side-impact air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal im- pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se- verity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

+ The seat belts, the supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags are most effective when you are

ing well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag in- flate with great force. Do not allow any- one to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seat- back of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are Shown in the previous illustrations.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

> WRS0466 1. SRS curtain side-impact air bag 6. Crash zone sensor modules 7... Occupant classification system control 2. SRS curtain side-impact air bags unit 3. Supplemental side air bag modules 8. Seat belt buckle switches for driver's 4... Diagnosis sensor unit and passenger’s side 5. Supplemental front air bag modules 1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor

11. Side satellite sensor

12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad- vanced air bag system for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regu- lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warn- ings in this manual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The supplemen- tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may in- flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental front air bag system operation.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dual stage inflators. It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit, seat bel buckle sensors, occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it additionally monitors the weight of an occupant or object on the seat and seat bel tension. Based on informa- tion from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turmed OFF under some conditions, depending on the weight de- tected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. fthe front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illumi- nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air bag and status light" later in this section for further details. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system:

H you have any questions about your air bag system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer. f you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairy loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok- ing. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas- senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision:

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The supplemental front bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

Front passenger air bag and status light

A WARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con- ditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec- essary for most effective protection. Fail- ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

The front passenger air bag status light Æ; is located below the radio. The light operates as follows

e Unoccupied passenger's seat: The 3%, is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and wil not inflate in a crash.

© Passenger's seat occupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The Æ2 _illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

_ Occupied passenger seat and the passen- ger meets the conditions outlined in this section: The light 3; is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera- tional.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto- matically tum OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in à crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto- matically tumed OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor). ltis in the bottom of the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. lt works together with seat belt sensors described later. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys- tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regula- tions is on the seat, its weight and the child's weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera- tion can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de- signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when it is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat belt, the advanced air bag system determines whether the front pas- senger air bag should be automatically tumed OFF as required by the regulations.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out- lined in this manual should not cause the passen- ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush- ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode), this could cause the air bag to be tumed OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil- dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. Ifthis is not possible, the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead

of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object's weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is au- tomatically tumed OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not iluminate when the front pas- senger seat is unoccupied.

Ifan adult occupant is in the seat but the passen- ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.

Ha child restraint must be used in the front seat, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. lfthe air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraintis installed propery, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. the air bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu- minate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light #7, located in the meter and gauges area in thé” center of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

e Do not place any objects on the steer- ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- jects may become dangerous projec- tiles and cause injury if the supplemen- tal front air bag inflates.

e Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may se- verely burn yourself.

e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.

e Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- pension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system.

+ Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above th: istrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.

e Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing mate- rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not speci cally designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica- tion sensor (pressure sensor).

e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Work on and around the supplemental front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri- cal equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re- straint System (SRS) wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unautho- rized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.

e A cracked windshield should be re- placed immediately by a qualified re- pair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.

e The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri- ate sections in this Owner's Manual.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Supplemental side-impact air bag and curtain side-impact air bags system

The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo- cated in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact air bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guide- lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of- position occupants. However, all of the infor- mation, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The supplemental side air bags and curtain side- impact air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate ifthe forces in another type of collision are similar

to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag operation

When the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fair loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptiy.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain side-impact air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. How- ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctiy womn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

practical away from the supplemental side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain side-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The supplemental side air bags and curtain ide-impact air bags operate only when the nition switch is in the ON or START posi- tions.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Do not place any objects near the seat- back of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates.

e Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system. This is to prevent acci-

flation of the side air bag and

impact air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag system.

e Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- pension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag and curtain si mpact air bag system.

e Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing mate- rial near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.

e Work around and on the curtain air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip- ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be mod or discon- nected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or cur- tain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Front seats)

e The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be re- placed together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

e If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre- tensioner system checked and, if nec- essary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer.

e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat belt system may result in serious per- sonal injury.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Work around and on the pre-tensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip- ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pre-tensioner seat belt system.

e If you need to dispose of the pre- tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental air bag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac- tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt's retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptiy.

After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated, load limiters allow the seat belt to release web-

bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light ® will not come on, will flash intermit- tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been tumed to the ON or START position. In this case, the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0169)| 1... SRS Air Bag Waming Labels (located on the sun visors) 2. SRS Side Air Bag Warning Labels (lo- cated on the door pillar)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Waming labels about the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying %- _ in the instrument panel, moni- tors the circuits ofthe supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tems. The circuits monitored by the supplemental air bag waming light are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain side- impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turms off. This means the system is operational.

H any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre- tensioner seat belt systems need servicing:

e_ The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

e The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

e_ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all

Under these conditions, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bag or pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not operate properly. It must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has oc- curred. Repair and replacement of these supple- mental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve- hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple- mental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Once a supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag or curtail side-impact air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, if any of the supplemental front air bags inflate, the activated pre-tensioner seat belts must also be replaced. The air bag mod- ule and pre-tensioner seat belt system should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt system cannot be repaired.

e The supplemental front air bag, side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys- tems, and the pre-tensioner seat belt system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle.

e If you need to dispose of the supple- mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat belt system or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tem disposal procedures are set fortl the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

2 Instruments and controls

Security systems .… . Vehicle security system. . …. NISSAN vehicle immobiizer system ……

Windshield wiper and washer switch Switch operation .

Rear window and outside mirror os so > equippec)

Headlight and turn signal switch. Xenon headlights (if so equipped) .….… Headlight control switch. …

Daytime running light system (Canada only) 2-24

Instrument brightness control .…. .2-25

Covered storage box. Grocery hooks Cargo nets .

Interior light. Personal lights . Front...

Side and center ventilators (P. 4-18) Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch (P.2-21)

Steering wheel switch for audio control and Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped) (P. 4-42, 4-43)

Instruments and controls

Meters and gauges (P. 2-8)

Driver supplemental air bag/hor

Security indicator light (P. 2-16)

… Front passenger supplemental air bag

.… Glove box (P. 2-34)

Audio system controls (P. 4-22) Climate controls (P. 4-19) Storage (P. 2-31)

.… Power outlet (P. 2-30)

Shift selector lever (P. 5-0)

… Til/telescopic steering wheel controls

.… Traction control system (TGS) off switch (if

so equipped) (P. 2-28) or Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-29)

Rear sonar system off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-29)

Outside mirror controls (P. 3-26) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-25)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er's Manual (if so equipped) See the page number indi

theses for operating details.

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

Instruments and controls 2-3

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna)

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer (D) records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer (2) records the distance of individual trips.

Changing the display

Push the change button () to change the display as follows:

TipLA] — Tip — Tip [A]

2-4 Instruments and controls

Resetting the trip odometer:

Push the change button (® for more than 1 second to reset the trip odometer to zero.

Elapsed time, driving distance and average speed information is also available. Refer to “Control panel buttons” in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems” section later in this manual.

TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine into the red zone (1).

ACAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera- ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range (D) when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration:

The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

À CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera- ture near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the nor- mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is over- heated, continued operation of the ve- hicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section for immediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, tuning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light ( M) ) comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis- ters E (Empty).

Instruments and controls 2-5

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The 4) indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

À CAUTION ef the vehicle runs out of fuel, the ONE malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips,

the ÈKE light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

e For additional information, see “Mal-

function indicator light (MIL)” later in this section.

2-6 Instruments and controls

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in- dicates the direction of the vehicle's heading.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the -Â- button as described in the chart below to activate various features of the automatic anti- glare rearview mirror.

Push and hold the -$- button for about:

Feature: (Push button again for about 1 sec- ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

5 seconds Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings

9 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust- ments” section.

Pushthe -Ÿ- button for about 1 second when the ignition switch is in the ON position to toggle the compass display (D on or off. The display will indicate the direction of the vehicle's heading

Hthe display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete ciroles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The com pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCEDURE The difference between magnetic north and geo- graphical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens:

1. Press and holdthe -- button for about 5 seconds. The current zone number will ap- pear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map. Refer to the illustration.

3. Pressthe -Ÿ- button repeatediy to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.

Inaccurate compass direction:

The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct direction is not shown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and hold the -f- switch for about 9 seconds. The display will read “C."

Instruments and controls 2-7

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

2. Calibrate the compas by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles the display should return to normal.

e_lfthe compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized dealer.

The compass may not indicate the correct compas point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve- hicle moves to an area where the geomag- netism is stabilized.)

e Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the op- eration of the compass.

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

2-8 Instruments and controls

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS ABS

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

Charge warning light

Door open waming light

Engine oil pressure waming light

Intelligent Key system warning light

Low fuel warning light

Low tire pressure warning light

CRUISE Low windshield washer fluid warning light

P Position selecting warning light

Seat belt waming light and chime

Supplemental air bag warning light

Trunk lid open warning light

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator light

CRUISE main switch indicator light

CE VDC Cruise SET switch indicator light

Front passenger air bag status light

High beam indicator light (Blue)

Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

‘Traction control system off indicator light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and tu the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights

ÉS,snae or ©), 2, €, À

H equipped, the following lights come on briefly

If any light fails to come on, it ma; a burned-out bulb or an open

electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

Instruments and controls 2-9

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

WARNING LIGHTS ABS ©" Anti-lock Braking © System (ABS)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational

H the ABS waming light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func- tion is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See "Brake system” in the "Starting and driving” sec-

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

BRAKE| Or Brake warning light

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

2-10 Instruments and controls

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main- tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the waming system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

© Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driv- ing could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driv- ing it could be dangerous.

Pressing the brake pedal with the en- gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis- tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

e If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

I this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not func- tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately.

À CAUTION Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

#Æ Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON position.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.

T The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to icate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

A CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil

warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

KEY | Intelligent Key system warning Æ ] ioht

The Intelligent Key system warning light illumi- nates green when the ignition switch can be tumed. The Intelligent Key system warning light illuminates red when the ignition switch cannot be turned

The Intelligent Key system waming light blinks red if the Intelligent Key is taken outside of the vehicle while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

e_Ifthe Intelligent Key system warning light blinks, make sure of the location of the Intel- ligent Key as soon as possible. The Intelli- gent Key should be carried by the driver while operating the vehicle.

e The Intelligent Key system warning light turns off about 10 seconds after the Intelli- gent Key is brought inside the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key system waming light blinks green indicating that the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged.

See “intelligent Key system” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low fuel warning light

Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is tumed ON, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

I the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres- sure, the warning light will iluminate. f you select the tire pressure information (if so equipped) in the display, the LOW PRESSURE warning mes- sage will be displayed. The tire pressure for each tire will also be displayed:

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi- nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres- sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The low tire pressure waming light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom- mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the

Instruments and controls 2-11

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the “Starting and driving” section and in the “In case of emergency" section.

H the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi- mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is tumed ON. The light will remain on after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by à NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the “Starting and driving” section.

e If the light does illuminate with the ig- ion switch turned ON, have the ve- icle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

2-12 Instruments and controls

If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re- place it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure wari is will flash for approximately The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

«+ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

À CAUTION The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.

+ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.

Be sure to install the specified size of res to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield washer fluid warning light

This light comes on when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

@£ | P position selecting warning Se] light

The light blinks red and warning buzzer beeps when the selector lever is not in the P position and you are outside the vehicle with the Intelli- gent Key.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

When the warning light blinks, move the selector lever to the P position and retum the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

# | Seat belt warning light and 1 chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is tumed tothe ON or START position and remains illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver's seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger's seat bel is not fastened when the front passenger's seat is occupied . For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position, the system does not activate the warn- ing light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light iluminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

H any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, and pre- tensioner seat belt systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

e_ The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

e The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittentiy.

e_ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre- tensioner seat belts may not function properiy. For additional details see “Supplemental restraint sys- tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supple- mental restraint system” section of this manual.

A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems (if so equipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

This light comes on when the trunk lid is not securely closed while the ignition keys in the ON position.

INDICATOR LIGHTS CVT Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) indicator

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light

comes on for 2 seconds.

D Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position

Trunk lid open warning light

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, this indicator light shows the CVT selector lever position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual

Cruise main switch indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational.

CRUISE Instruments and controls 2-13

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Cruise set switch indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. Ifthe light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning prop- erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SET Front passenger air bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light ( #2 ) will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation, see “Front passenger air bag and status light" in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

O High beam indicator light (blue) This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.

2-14 Instruments and controls

SERVICE Nan | Malfunction indicator light SOON

the malfunction indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indi- cate a potential emission control and/or CVT malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the #Æ# light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys- tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi- ness for inspection/maintenance (1/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways:

© Malfunction indicator light on steady — An emission control system and/or CVT mal- function has been detected. Check the fuel- filer cap. If the fuel-filer cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and con- tinue to drive the vehicle. The #8 light should tum off after a few driving tips. If the BE light does not turn off after a few diving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

e_ Malfuntion indicator light blinking — An en- gine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To re- duce or avoid emission control system dam- age:

— do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h)

— avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

— avoid steep uphil grades.

— if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

À CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav- ing the emi n control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission con- trol system.

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light will blink when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly.

SLIP The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on or does not go off, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

a Traction control system off indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the traction control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi- cates the traction control system is not operating.

Push the traction control off switch again or re- start the engine and the system will operate nor- mally. See “Traction control system (TCS)" in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The traction control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will tu off after about 2 secondés if the traction control system (TCS) is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica- tor light while you are driving, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the traction control system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system Working when starting the vehicle or accelerat- ing, but this is normal

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the vehicle dynamic control system is not operating.

Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual

The vehicle dynamic control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving, have the vehicle dynamic control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the vehicle dynamic control system is op- erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or ac- celerating, but this is normal.

Instruments and controls 2-15

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedel is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the waming sound is heard.

A chime sounds if the driver's door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav- ing the vehicle.

Intelligent Key door buzzer

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one of the following improper operations is found.

e_ The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors.

2-16 Instruments and controls

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See “intell- gent Key system” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

SECURITY SYSTEMS LICO301

Your vehicle has two types of security systems: © Vehicle security system © NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Tum the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- tion and remove the key.

3. Close the trunk lid and all doors. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with:

Intelligent Key operation:

e Pushthe {) button. Al doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice and the hom beeps once to indicate all doors are locked.

e Whenthe {button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re- minder that the doors are already locked

The hom may or may not beep. Refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature” (vehicles without navigation system) in the “Pre- driving check and adjustments” section or “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with navigation system) in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone sys- tems” section later in this manual.

. Confirm that the security indicator light

comes on. The security light stays on for about 80 seconds. The vehicle security sys- tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec- onds the vehicle security system automati- cally shifts into the armed phase. The security light begins to flash once every 3 seconds. ff, during the 30-second pre-arm time period, the driver's door is unlocked by the key, a request switch or the Intelligent Key, or if the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not arm.

e_Ifthe key is turned slowly when locking the driver’s door, the system may not arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key, the system may be disarmed when the key is removed. If the cator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again.

e Even when the driver and/or passen- gers are in the vehicle, the system will arm with all doors and trunk lid closed and locked with the ignition key in the OFF position.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:

The headlights blink and the hom sounds intermittently.

© The alarm automatically tumns off after ap- proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the drivers door with the key, a request switch or by pressing the {button on the Intelligent Key.

Instruments and controls 2-17

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The alarm is activated by:

opening the door or trunk lid without using the key, a request switch or the Intelligent Key (even ifthe dooris unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch)

+ openingthe trunk lid by operating the interior trunk lid release.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the drivers door with the key, a request switch or by pressing the {@ button on the Intelligent Key.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.

I the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following pro- cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.

2-18 Instruments and controls

2. Tum the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 sec- onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

I the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the follow- ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX- PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE- SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER- ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light @ is located on the instrument panel near the windshield.

The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK position with the key removed from the ignition switch.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im- mobilizer System is operational.

Ifthe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal- functioning, the light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en- gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser- vice as soon as possible. Please bring all keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:

@ intermittent — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward @ (Slower) or (8) (Faster). Also, the intermit- tent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)

Instruments and controls 2-19

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func- tion for vehicles with navigation Refer to “Vehicle electronic system: the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au- dio and phone systems” section later in this manual.

@ Low — continuous low speed operation @ High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up (4) to have one sweep opera- tion of the wiper

Pull the lever toward you (6) to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

A WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu- tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your jon which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

2-20 Instruments and controls

À CAUTION Do not operate the washer continu- ously for more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the reser- voir tank is empty.

Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser- voir tank.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen- trate and water.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH WICO995|

To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

ACAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or dam- age the rear window defroster.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The top few rows of wires on the rear wii dow are not part of the rear window de- froster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio system.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped)

AWARNING ANHIGH VOLTAGE

e When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xe- non headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer.

+ Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional head- lights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncom- ing driver or the dri ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

e The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off opera- tion. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal).

e _lfthe xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out, the brightness will drasti- cally decrease, the light will start blink- ing, or the color of the light will be- come reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Instruments and controls 2-21

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) (02/07/07 —debbie 1

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting

@ When turning the switch to the posi- tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights come on.

@ When turning the switch to the #2 posi- tion, the headlights come on and allthe other lights remain on

2-22 Instruments and controls

À CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:

e Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights au- tomatically when it is dark.

e_ Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after you tu the key to OFF and all doors are closed

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad- justed for vehicles with navigation system. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au- dio and phone systems” section later in this manual.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi- tion ©.

2. Tum the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is tumed OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, or #0 position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor (®) located in the top side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov- ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the key in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

Headlight beam select

@ To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on andthe 20 light illuminates.

® Puling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the headlight switch is in the: or #2 posi- tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

Instruments and controls 2-23

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

À CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au- tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the head- light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM (Canada only)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi- nate when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights oper- ate with the headight switch in the OFF, or AUTO position. Tum the headlight switch to the AUTO or #0 position for headlight illumi- nation when driving at night.

Hthe parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-

nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released. The daytime run- ning lights remain on until the ignition switch is tumed off.

A WARNING When the daytime running light system is active, other lights on your vehicle may not be on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident, injuring yourself and others.

Headight switch position:

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni- tion switch is in ON position.

The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the AUTO, =D: or #2 position.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru- ment panel lights when driving at night.

The instrument brightness control will not adjust the brightness when the headlights or parking lights are off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal

@ Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the tum is com- pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically

@ To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH To tum the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the #0 position, then turn the fog light switchtothe #{) position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, thenturnthe foglightswitchtothe #{[) position.

To tum the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

Instruments and controls 2-25

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CORNERING LIGHT The comering light provides additional illumina- tion toward the tuning direction. The cornering light will iluminate on the turning direction side when a turn is signaled with the headlights on.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Push the switch on to wa other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi- tions. All tu signal lights flash.

e If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.

+ Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other trai

e Turn signals do not work when the haz- ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

To sound the hom, push the center pad area of

A WARNING Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tam- pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

The front and rear seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if so equipped). The switches are lo- cated on the center consoles.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or Hi position of the switch, as desired. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

À CAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.

Do not put anything on the seat which sulates heat, such as a blanket, cush- n, Seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.

Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat Should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- lar materials.

If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.

Instruments and controls 2-27

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below approximately 68°F (20°C).

The heated steering wheel switch is located on the front of the console box

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on.

Ifthe surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C), then turn off automatically.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering off manually. The indicator light will go off.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con- trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.

I the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, tum the TCS off.

To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the “TCS OFF" switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system. See “Traction control system (TCS)" in the “Starting and driv- ing” section:

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv- ing conditions.

H the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle dy- namic control (VDC) system" in the “Starting and driving” section.

A WARNING The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back- ing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly.

The rear sonar system is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift selector lever is in R (Reverse)

When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.

The rear sonar system can be disabled by push- ingthe OFF switch. When the system is disabled, the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. Push the switch again to enable the system. The indicator light will go off.

The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is turned on.

See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section.

Instruments and controls 2-29

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 Volt, 120 W (10A) maximum.

The power outlet located in the front center con- sole is powered directly by the vehicle battery. The other outlets are powered only when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Front center console

À CAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.

The power outlets are not designed for use with a cigarette lighter.

Do not use with accessories that ex- ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.

Use power outlets with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.

Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.

Push the plu: as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.

When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the outlet.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver's and passenger's seats. The pockets

can be used to store maps.

Instruments and controls 2-31

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

A WARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident.

2-32 Instruments and controls

e Do not use for anything other than sunglasses.

e Do not leave sunglasses in the sun- glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS A CAUTION

+ Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent Spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

e Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

To open the front cup holders, push the cup holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and push down until i clicks in place.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The plastic cup insert may be removed for clean- ing. The rear cup holders are located in the fold-down

armrest in the rear seat back or in the rear center console.

Rear — Type A To open the cup holders on the rear fold-down armrest, lift the cup holder lid. To close, lower the lid.

Rear — Type B To open the cup holders on the rear center con- sole, push the button. The cup holder lid will open. To close, gentiy push the lid toward the center.

Instruments and controls 2-33

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

GLOVE BOX Open the glove boxby pulling the handle. Use the mechanical key when locking (D or unlocking (2) the glove box.

A WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Insert your finger into to the recess (D) and slide the armrest forward to the desired position.

Pull up on the latch to open the console box. Remove the inside tray to store a large object.

The console box may be used for storage of cellular phones. You can route a cord through the

access notch (®) to the power outlet inside the console box.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

LICO426 WICO697 LIC1001

REAR CENTER CONSOLE (if so The light inside the rear center console box may COVERED STORAGE BOX equipped) be turned on (D) and off (2) with the switch.

Push the bottom center of the lid to open. Pull up on the lever to open the console box

Instruments and controls 2-35

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The cargo nets help keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while the vehicle is in motion.

LICO748 LIC1226 GROCERY HOOKS CARGO NETS The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and can be used to hang a standard size plastic AWARNING grocery bag. e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

A to help prevent it from sl

ACAUTION Do not apply a total load of more than 20 unsecured cargolcoulu)cause personal lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook. ER

+ Be sure to secure all four hooks into the retainers. The cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or the net may not stay secured.

2-36 Instruments and controls

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

To install a cargo net, attach the net to the retain- ers.

To remove a cargo net, detach the net from the retainers.

WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS A WARNING

e Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while i in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.

+ Donotleave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended chil- dren could become involved in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. the driver's or passenger's door is opened during this period of about 45 sec- onds, power to the windows is canceled.

Power door lock switch Window lock button

Front passenger side

Right rear passenger side Left rear passenger side Driver side automatic switch

Driver's side power window switch

The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all ofthe windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch

Instruments and controls 2-37

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Front passenger's power window switch

The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's window. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down @). To close the window, pull the switch up @.

2-38 Instruments and controls

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down @). To close the window, pull the switch up @).

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock button is depressed, only the drivers side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window switch down (only driver's side shown) to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window auto- matically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pullthe switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held.

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation:

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse fun may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc- curs.

A WARNING There are some small distances immedi- ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

Ithe control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately low- ered.

SKYVIEW"" GLASS-PANELED ROOF SUNROOF (if so equipped)

Open or close the SkyView roof shade by sliding it from side to side.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition key is tumed to the ACC or OFF position. the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened during this period of about 45 sec- onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

To open the roof, slide the switch to the OPEN position (D. When the roof is tilted up, it will automatically tilt down and then open.

Instruments and controls 2-39

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

To close the roof, slide the switch to the CLOSE position (2).

The position of the sliding roof lid can be chosen by the position of the sliding switch

To fully open or close the roof, completely move the switch to the open or closed position.

To tilt the sunroof up, push the tilt switch to the UP position (@). When the roof is open, it will automatically close and then tilt up. To tilt the sunroof down, push the tilt switch to the DOWN position (@).

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri- cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality detected. Use the following reset procedure to return sunroof operation to normal.

1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the titing switch repeatedly toward the DOWN posi- tion to fully close the lid

2. Push and hold the titing switch for more than 2 seconds toward the DOWN position to reestablish the lid's home position:

The sunroof should now operate normally.

2-40 Instruments and controls

Auto reverse function (when closing or titing down the sunroof)

The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds afterthe ignition key is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof oc- curs.

A WARNING There are some small distances imme: ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof.

Ifthe control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will immediately open backward.

Ifthe control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi- ately tit up.

H the auto reverse function malfunctions and re- peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keep pushing the tit down switch within 5 seconds after it happens; the sunroof will fully close gradu- ally. Make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof.

+ In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. AI- ways use seat belts and child restraints.

e Do not allow anyone to stand up or ex- n of their body out of the

g the vehii in motion or while the sunroof is cli g-

+ Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening.

e Do not place heavy objects on the sun- roof or surrounding area.

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for- ward or backward.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped)

e To avoid personal injury, keep your hands, fingers and head away from the sun shade arm, arm rail and screen inlet port.

Do not allow children near the rear sun shade system. They could be injured.

e Do not place objects on or near the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.

e Do not pull or push the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.

The rear sun shade operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

The rear sun shade switches are located on the front and rear center consoles.

To raise the screen, push the upper side of the switch.

To lower the screen, push the lower side of the switch.

The switch need not be held down

e Do not place objects (such as newspa- pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen inlet port. Doing so may entangle these objects in the screen when it is extend- ing or retracting, causing improper op- eration or damage to the screen.

e Do not push the sun shade arm with your hands, etc., as this may deform it.

Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.

Instruments and controls 2-41

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result proper operation or damage the screen.

e Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doing so may elongate the screen. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.

2-42 Instruments and controls

INTERIOR LIGHT LICO907|

The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.

e When the switch is in the ON position (D, the interior light illuminates, regardiess of door position. The light will go off after 30 minutes unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

e When the switch is in the center DOOR position (2), the front and rear personal lights wil illuminate under the following con- ditions:

— Drivers door is unlocked while the igni- tion key is removed from the key cylinder.

Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds.

— Drivers door is opened. Lights remain on for à maximum of 80 seconds after drivers door is closed

— Ignition key is removed from key cylinder. Lights remain on for à maximum of 30 seconds.

The lights will go off when the ignition key is in the ON position, or the driver's door is closed and locked

The lights will also go off after 80 minutes when

e When the switch is in the OFF position (@), the interior light does not illuminate, regard- less of door position.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The footwell and doorstep lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after 30 minutes while doors are open to prevent the battery from be- coming discharged.

A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS LICO908|

FRONT To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To turn them off, press the switches again.

A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

The console light @ will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control.

Instruments and controls 2-43

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

REAR To turn on both personal reading lights, press the switchtothe 4 position (). To turn the lights off, return the switch to the center position.

To turn on a single personal reading light, press the switch to the sn position (@). To turn a single personal reading light off, return the switch to the center position.

2-44 Instruments and controls

TRUNK LIGHT The light iluminates when the trunk lid is opened When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte- rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

els powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehi- cle's battery is discharged or is discon- nected, HomeLink® will retain all program- ming.

Once the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original trans- mitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons Should be erased for security purposes. For additional information refer to “Program- ming HomeLink®” later in this section.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

+ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re- verse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards be- came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). À ga- rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features in- creases the risk of serious injury or death.

e During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming.

e Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

1. To begin, press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons (to clear the memory) until the indicator light @) blinks (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end ofthe hand-held transmitter 1-8 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface.

8. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter but- ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.

Instruments and controls 2-45

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink® flashes, changing from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flash- ing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other pro- grammed device, press and hold the pro- grammed HomeLink® button — releasing when the device begins to activate.

5. Ifthe indicator light on the HomeLink® blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink® has picked up a “rolling code” garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink® to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another per- son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro- gram button located on the garage door openers motor to activate the “training mode". This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button.

2-46 Instruments and controls

Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open- er's motor and the “tr: ng light” is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. Use the help of a second person for conve- nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas- ing the garage door opener program button, quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink® button you've just programmed Press and release the HomeLink® button up to 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink® button should now be pro- grammed. (To program the remaining HomeLink® buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.)

NOTE: Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to “clear” all previously programmed

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec- onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink®, continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro- gramming HomeLink®”) while you press and re- press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming).

When programming a garage door opener, etc. it is advised to unplug the device dur- g the “cycling” process to prevent pos- sible damage to the garage door opener components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once pro- grammed) may now be used to activate the ga- rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap- propriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS Hthe HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand- held transmitter information:

«replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.

press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- ruption.

© position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position — keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department, The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK® BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® but- ton. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button.

4. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash, first slowiy and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN I your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-roling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manu- facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer- sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful in- terference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, in- cluding interference that may cause undes- ired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com- plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's authority to op- erate the equipment.

Instruments and controls 2-47

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

2-48 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys … Intelligent Keys. NISSAN vehicle immobiizer system keys.

Locking with Key... Locking with inside lock knob . Locking with power door lock switch Child safety rear door lock. …

2. Mechanical keys with built-in transpon- der chip (inside Intelligent Keys)

INTELLIGENT KEYS Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel- ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve- hicle Immobilzer System components. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be regis- tered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Inteligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Im- mobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the reg-

8-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

istration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it

e Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

e Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

+ Do notstrike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.

e Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem- peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

e Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.

e Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key, which can be used in case of a discharged bat- tery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation in the same way as an ordinary key.

À CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me- chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the proce- dures below.

1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF position.

2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli- gent Key.

8. Lock the glove box and the trunk pass- through with the mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you.

See “Trunk lid” later in this section, “Storage” in the “instruments and controls” section and “Seats” in the “Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the master keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilier System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone, give them the Intelligent Key only, not the mechanical key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Additional or replacement keys:

I you stil have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilier System keys. Your dealer can dupli- cate our existing key. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be- cause the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.

ng checks and adjustments 3-3

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

Do not allow the immobilzer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with salt water. This could affect system function.

8-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

e Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open- ing the doors, and will help keep out intruders.

e Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front (D of the vehicle locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear (2 ofthe vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral @ (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors @).

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Opening and closing windows

The driver's door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto- matic operation at the same time.

«To open the windows, turn the driver's door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked.

«To close the windows, turn the drivers door key to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position (D), then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position (2).

Door lock switch — Type A LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side), to the lock position (D). When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (drivers or front passenger's side) to the unlock position (2).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

WPD0381 Door lock switch — Type B

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the power door lock switch (drivers or front passenger's side) is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition and any door open, all doors will lock and then unlock auto- matically. This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentall, especially when small children are in the vehicle

The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, the door can be opened only from the outside.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM A WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect elec- tric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may af- fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system.

e Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.

e Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel- ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions.

e When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.

e_ When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, and CB radio.

e_ Whenthe Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.

e_ When any type ofradio wave remote control is used nearby.

e_ When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com- puter.

e_ When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery's life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis- charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel- ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink green for about 80 seconds afier the ignition Switch is turned to the ON position.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig- nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat- tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat- tery, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it- yourself" section.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer

e Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.

e Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

ng checks and adjustments 3-7

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem- peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

e Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.

e Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli- gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch @).

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat- ing location, the Intelligent Key system's operat- ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch @.

Ithe Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION

+ Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as ilustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli- gent Key is outside the vehicle.

e_ After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

e_ To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the key with you and then lock the doors.

e_ Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch within the range of opera- tion.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

8. Push any door handle request switch (® while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position.

e Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open. However, doors lock with the me- chanical key even if any door is open.

e Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with an- other Intelligent Key.

e After locking the doors using the re- quest switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles or the trunk opener switch.

+ When locking the doors using the re- quest switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be- fore operating the request s: h to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.

e The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been de- tected by the Intelligent Key system.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci- dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the drivers side door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed: the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds.

A CAUTION The lockout protection may not function

under the following conditions:

e When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel.

e When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the rear parcel shelf.

e When the Intelligent Key is placed in- side the glove box or a storage bin.

e When the Intelligent Key is placed in- side the door pockets.

e When the Intelligent Key is placed on or under the spare tire area.

e When the Intelligent Key is placed in- side or near metallic mate:

The lockout protection may function when

the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle

but it is too close to the vehicle.

Unlocking doors 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. 2. Push the door handle request switch ©.

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and'the outside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch (D again within 1 minute to unlock all doors.

I à door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. fthe door does not unlock after return- ing the door handle, push the door handle re- quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch.

©_Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for 80 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 80 seconds by performing one of the follow- ing operations.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e_ Lockingthe doors withthe remote controller.

+ Switching the room light switch to the OFF position.

g checks and adjustments

Opening the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk opener request switch (® for more than 1 second while carrying the Intel- ligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk. Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci- dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will open.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance de- pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func- tion under the following conditions:

When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range.

e When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- charged

À CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli- gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

3. Pushthe {button on the Intelligent Key.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

À CAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli- gent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles.

Unlocking doors 1. Pushthe À buttononthe Intelligent Key.

2. The hazard waming lights flash once.

3. Pushthe A button again within 1 minute to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the {@ button.

©_Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The interior light iluminates for 80 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by performing one of the following op- erations.

+ Lockingthe doors with the remote controller. _ Switching the room light switch to the OFF position. Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simulta- neously.

To open the windows, pressthe (À but- ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec- onds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing the {@ button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed by using the keyfob.

g checks and adjustments

Push the %% _ button for longer than 0.5 sec- ondto open the trunklid. The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel switch" in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pushing and holding the X[1 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds.

The panic alarm stops when: e_it has run for 25 seconds, or

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Silencing the horn beep feature

H desired, the hor beep feature can be deacti- vated using the Intelligent Key.

If you change the horn beep and lamp flash feature with the keyfob, the display screen (if so equipped) will not show the current mode and cannot be used to change the mode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre- vious mode and re-enable the display screen control.

To deactivate: Press and hold the {| and f@ buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the hom beep feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the {À and f buttons for at least 2 seconds once more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the hom will sound once to confirm that the hom beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the homn beep feature does not si- lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WPD0380 @ P position selecting warning light @ _ Intelligent Key system warning light

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS The Intelligent Key system is equipped with a function that is designed to minimize improper operations and to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen. The warning buzzer sounds and the warning light illuminates when improper opera tions are detected.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

A CAUTION When the buzzer sounds and the warning light illuminates, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex- pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning light comes on in the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or the waming light comes on, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

Audible reminder and warning when locking the doors

When the chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle, check for the following:

The ignition switch is tumed to the LOCK position.

e_ The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve- hicle.

e_ The selector lever is in the P position.

g checks and adjustments

Audible reminder and warning when the engine stops

When the P position selecting waming light (B£ Jin the instrument panel blinks in red

e Make sure the selector lever is in the P position.

When the chime sounds intermittentiy:

the chime sounds continuously when the driv- er's door is opened, check the following:

e_ The selectorleveris in the P position and the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi- tion.

e_ The mechanical key is not inserted into the ignition switch.

The waming chime may stop when one of the following is performed:

— Returning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

— Removing the mechanical key.

— Closing the doors.

Alarm and warning when the engine starts

When the Intelligent Key system warning light (1 ) blinks red and the outside buzzer sounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Warning for low battery power

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel- ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink green for about 80 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. This warning is to let you know that the battery of the Intelligent Key will run down soon. Replace it with a new one. Refer to “Battery replacement" in the “Main- tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

NISSAN recommends replacing the battery at a NISSAN dealer.

Preventing the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle

If you lock all doors using the power door lock switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all of

the doors unlock immediately and the buzzer will war you when the door is closed

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

When pushing the door handle request switch

The front door beep sounds for approximately 2 seconds.

‘The doors cannot be locked.

Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle and push the door handle request switch

When closing the doors

The front door beep sounds for approximately 10 seconds.

The ignition knob is not tumed to LOCK position.

Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.

The key warning light in the instrument panel blinks in red and the front door warning beep sounds for approximately 8 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The front door beep sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle.

Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle and close the door.

When opening the drivers door

À waming chime sounds continuous

The ignition knob is not in LOCK position, or the me- chanical key is inserted into the ignition knob.

Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.

Remove the mechanical key from the ignition knob.

When stopping the engine

The P position warning light in the instrument panel blinks in red.

The selector lever is not in the P (Park) position.

Make sure that the selector lever is in the P (Park) position and turn the ignition knob to LOCK.

When tuning the ignition knob

The waming chime sounds

The ignition knob is not tumed to LOCK:

Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.

When starting the engine

The key warning light in the instrument panel blinks in green.

The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. See “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section.

When tuning the ignition switch

À waming chime sounds continuous

À waming chime sounds continuously and the Intelligent Key lock warning light blinks.

The ignition switch is not tumed to the LOCK position.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

When pushing the ignition switch

The Intelligent Key system warning light in the instrument panel illuminates red.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.

the Intelligent Key system warning light iluminates red even while you are carying the Intelligent Key, the battery is completely discharged. Replace the battery with a new one. See “Battery re- placement" in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

@ Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.

@ Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

e Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Fail- ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.

e If you see steam or smoke comi: the engine compartment, to avoi do not open the hood.

e Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-

the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH The trunk lid release switch is located below the armrest of the drivers door trim panel. To open the trunk lid, pull the trunk lid release switch.

To close the trunk id, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

You can open the trunk lid with Intelligent Key. Refer to “intelligent Key system" earlier in this section.

When the cancel switch located inside the glove box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release switch or with the Intelligent Key.

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE (4-seat model only)

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, fold down the trunk compartment access lid and pull the rear seat trunk release handle ®. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE A WARNING Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi- nated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light

The handle is located inside the trunk compart- ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR LPDO188|

OPENER OPERATION The fuel-filler door release is located on the driv- ers door. To open the fuel-filler door, push the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door se- curely.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

FUEL-FILLER CAP The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder © while refueling.

A WARNING Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi- tions. You could be burned or seriously injured i is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a third of a turn, and wait for any “hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possibly causing personal injury. Then remove the cap.

Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel Spray and possibly a fire.

Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis- sion control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

e Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

ler. To reduce the risk of serious jury or death when filling portable fuel containers:

— Always place the container on the ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices when filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill- ingit.

— Use only approved portable fuel con- tainers for flammable liquid.

e If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap QE properly may cause the ŒE mal- function indicator light uit) to illumi- nate. Ifthe QE light illuminates be- cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The ONE light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the QE light

does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

e For additional information, see the “Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and Controls” section earlier in this manual.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

A CAUTION Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driv- er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

WPD0366 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so equipped)

Push the switch ® to adjust the steering wheel up or down (2) to the desired position.

The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the drivers door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily. The

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

steering wheel moves back into position when the drivers door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed.

For more information, see “Automatic drive posi- tioner" later in this section.

Telescopic operation

Push the switch (© to adjust the steering wheel forward or backward @) to the desired position

MANUAL OPERATION Tilt operation

Pull the lock lever D forward and adjust the steering wheel up or down (2) to the desired position.

Push the lock lever back to lock the steering wheel in place

Telescopic operation

Push the lock lever @) down and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward (4) to the desired position.

Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steering wheel in place.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

@ Toblockglare from the front, swing down the main sun visor.

@ Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed

+ Do notstore the sun visor before return- ing the extension to its original position.

+ Do not pull the extension sun visor forc- edly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR The inside mirror is designed so that it automati- cally dims according to the intensity of the head- lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position:

The indicator light @ will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

e the © button for inside mirrors without compass.

With compass e the © button for inside mirrors with

compass. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again, press

e the | button for inside mirrors without compass.

e the O button for inside mirrors with compass.

The indicator light will turn on.

Some vehicles are also equipped with automatic anti-glare outside mirrors. For additional informa- tion, see “Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors" later in this section.

For information on HomeLink® Universal Trans- ceiver operation, see the “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls" sec- tion of this manual.

For information on the compass display (if so equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru- ments and controls” section of this manual.

Do not hang any objects over the sensors © or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch @ to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch (2.

g checks and adjustments

+ Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

e Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors (if so equipped)

The outside mirrors will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti- glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror willilluminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is on.

To tu off the automatic anti-glare feature, press

e the O button onrearview mirrors without compass.

button on rearview mirrors with

The indicator light will turn off

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again, press:

e the | button on rearview mirrors without compass. ethe O button on rearniew mirrors

equipped with compas. The indicator light will turn on.

For information on the automatic anti-glare rear- view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” earlier in this section

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Manual folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)

Push the mirrors backward to fold them.

Power folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)

À CAUTION Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors.

Press the switch to open or close the mirrors.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so equipped) The reverse tit-down feature will tum the se-

lected outside mirror surface downward to pro- vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, turn the outside mirror control switch to the left or right position. Only one mirror can be selected at a time.

Move the shift selector lever to R (Reverse). The selected mirror will turn downward.

The selected mirror surface will return to its origi- nal position when any of the following have oc- curred:

e_ The ignition switch is tumed OFF.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

If the outside mirror control switch the neutral position, neither mirror will turn downward when the shift selector lever is moved to R (Reverse).

For more information regarding this feature and how to save the R (Reverse) mirror tilt-down adjustment in the automatic drive positioner memory, refer to “Automatic drive positioner" later in this section.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

The electric control type outside mirrors (if so equipped) can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Press the rear win- dow defogger switch to activate the heating function. Press the switch again to deactivate, or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

g checks and adjustments

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system has two features: Memory storage function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Two positions for the driver's seat, steering col- umn, and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.

1. Set the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) selector lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

3. Adjust the driver's seat, steering column, and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see “Seats" in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section and “Pedal position adjustment” and “Outside mirrors" earlier in this section:

During this step, do not tum the ignition to any position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and staÿ on for approxi- mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the se- lected positions are stored in the selected memory (1 or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted. Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position

Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory

position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow- ing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi- tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec- onds, press the button on the keyfob. The indicator light will blink. After the indica- tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that memory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch, press the button on the keyfob. The driv- er's seat and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position.

If a new memory position is saved to the memory switch, the keyfob automatically re-links. Procedure for storing the outside mirror positions for best visibility when backing up An outside mirror position for backing up can be stored for each memory switch (1 and 2)

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition ON. (Do not start the en- gine.)

Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second to operate the automatic drive positioner.

Turn the outside mirror control switch to L (left).

Depress the brake pedal. Move the CVT selector lever to R (Reverse).

Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing po- sition for backing up by operating the out- side mirror control switch

Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch 1 or 2 selected in step 3 fully for at least 1 second

The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi- mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the se- lected mirror position is stored in the se- lected memory (1 or 2).

Turn the outside mirror control switch to R (right). Repeat the above procedure to ad- just the right mirror position and store in the selected memory.

When the drivers seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mirrors are not in the memorized position, the outside mirror will move with the initial tit-down angle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Confirming memory storage

e Tum the ignition ON and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has stored the position, the indica- tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec- onds.

e_Ifthe battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the memory storage function will be canceled and must be restarted before a stored memory position can be set again Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to restart the memory storage function. You can also restart the memory storage function using the following procedure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse.

2. Open and close the drivers door more than two times with the ignition key in the LOCK position.

Once the memory storage function has been restarted, you can store a memory position. See “Memory storage function" earlier in this section.

g checks and adjustments

Selecting the memorized position

Set the CVT selector lever to the P (Park) posi- tion, then:

The drivers seat, steering column, and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light blinking, and then the light wil stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION This system is designed so that the drivers seat and automatic operation steering column (if so equipped) will automatically move when the CVT selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver's seat more easily.

The drivers seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up when the drivers door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position

The drivers seat and steering wheel will return to previous position when the drivers dooris closed and the ignition switch is pushed

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can- celed. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems” section of this manual.

Restarting the entry/exit function

I the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled. Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart the entry/exit function using the following proce- dure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse.

2. Open and close the drivers door more than two times with the ignition key in the LOCK position.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions:

e_ When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h).

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.

When the adjusting switch for the driver's seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating.

When the seat has been already moved to the memorized position.

e When no seat position is stored in the memory switch.

When the driver's door remains open more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled for vehicles with naviga- tion system. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems” section of this manual

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons — with monochrome screen ….

Radio nrcesseseesseseeeseseee....4-22

How to use the TRIP INFO button... FM radio reception 4-22 Clock dereeees AM radio reception . 4-23 How to use the AUDIO button Satellite radio reception Gr: s0 ; equipped) . 4-28 (for control panel) . 4-5 Audio operation precautions . ..…..4-28 Door warning . 4-6 FM/AMI/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

Control panel buttons — with navigation system... 4-6 player (Type A)/CD changer (Type B)..… 4-29 How to use the joystick and ENTER button... 4-7 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact d disc co

How to use the BACK button. Setting up the start-up screen

changer . CD care and cleaning.

How to use the TRIP button Steerng wheel swilch for audio contol La How to use the SETTING button .…… Car phone or CB radio! 443 4/2 button... Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

Ventilators . (if so equipped) .

Heater and a air conditioner (automatic) Automatic operation Manual operation Operating tips.

Servicing air conditioner. .

Using the system … Control buttons Getting started. List of voice commands Speaker adaptation (SA) mode... Troubleshooting guide

e Do not disassemble or modify this sys- tem. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.

e Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill quid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. lgnoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock.

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH MONOCHROME SCREEN

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

3. 4 AUDIO button (P. 4-5)

When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start.

TRIP INFO button — This is a button on the control panel. By pressing this button you can select the item or perform this action.

HOW TO USE THE TRIP INFO BUTTON When the TRIP INFO button is pressed, the following modes will display on the screen.

Dist. to Empty — Average Speed — Fuel Economy — Trip Time — Audio or OFF —+ Dist. to Empty

The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you With an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level is low, the DTE display will change to —.

e_lfthe amount of fuel added while the ignition switchis OFF is small, the display just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may con- tinue to be displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Average speed (MPH or km/h)

The Average Speed mode shows the average speed since the last reset. To calculate the aver- age speed, driving distance is divided by driving time.

For approximately the first 30 seconds after a reset or reconnecting the battery cables, the display will show —.

Resetting average speed

The average speed calculation can be reset to 0. Press the TRIP INFO button for more than ap- proximately 2 seconds.

Fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Fuel Economy mode shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.

For approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset or connecting the battery cables, the display will show —.

Resetting fuel economy

The fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0. Press the TRIP INFO button for more than ap- proximately 2 seconds.

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Trip time The trip time mode displays the trip time since the last reset.

The maximum time that can be displayed by the Trip Time screen is 99 hours : 59 minutes : 59 seconds.

The Trip Time calculation can be reset to 0. Press the TRIP INFO button for more than approxi- mately 2 seconds.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CLOCK The digital clock displays the time when the igni- tion key is in OFF, ACC or ON. To enable the clock display, press the CLOCK DISP button.

If the power supply is disconnected, the

clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

The audio system must be tumed off to adjustthe time.

To adjust the time, press and hold the CLOCK DISP button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. Hour Adjust will appear on the screen and the hours will start flashing,

Press the SEEK or TUNE button to adjust the hour.

Press the CLOCK DISP button again. Minute Adjust will appear on the screen and the minutes will start flashing.

Press the SEEK or TUNE button to adjust the minutes.

Press the CLOCK DISP button again. Clock Is Set will appear on the screen.

If you enter the clock adjustment mode and do not press any button for approximately 7 seconds, the screen will change to Clock Is Set. The screen will exit out of the clock adjustment mode and return to the audio or off screen.

HOW TO USE THE AUDIO BUTTON (for control panel)

The audio system must be turned on to access this menu.

Pressing the + AUDIO button will change the settings menu as follows:

Bass — Mid — Treble —+ Fade — Balance — Speed Sense Volume — Beep ON/OFF — Lan- guage — Audio or OFF — Bass

For additional information, see “Audio System” later in this section.

To turn off the beep, press the TUNE button to select “OFF”. This will disable the beep sound during menu selection (except some caution beep sounds)

The language can be changed to “ENGLISH” or “FRANÇAIS” by pressing the TUNE button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM LHAO672

the door is open for longer than 10 seconds the screen will no longer display which door is open, but the DOOR OPEN warning will remain until the door is closed.

#12 brightness control button

BACK (previous) button (P. 4-7) Joystick and ENTER button (P. 4-7) SÉTTING button (P. 4-11)

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

“For Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner's Manual

When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start.

ENTER button — This is a button on the control panel.

“Display” key — This is a select key on the screen

By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function.

HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to

highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button to select the item or perform the action.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON This button has two functions. © Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button during setup, the sétup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen

In some screens pressing the BACK button ac- cepts the changes made during setup.

SETTING UP THE START-UP SCREEN When you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, the system start-up warning is displayed on the screen. Read the warning and select the “OK” key by pressing the ENTER button.

If you do not press the ENTER button, the Navi- gation system will not proceed to the next step in the Navigation display.

I you do not touch a button or screen key for more than 1 minute on the system start-up warn- ing screen, the screen will change to the audio screen automatically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner's Manual.

CI TRIP 1 8:33 Elapsed Time

Warning message (if any) — TRIP 1 — TRIP 2 — FUEL ECONOMY — MAINTENANCE — Audio or OFF — TRIP 1

Each trip display tracks an independent trip and displays the following

e Elapsed Time - Journey time since the last reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59 minutes.

e Driving Distance - Distance driven (mile or km) since the last reset.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Average Speed - Average speed driven (MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

Resetting trip 1 and trip 2

Each trip screen can be reset to O. Press the TRIP button to select the TRIP screen to be reset.

e_ Select the “Reset” key on screen by press- ing the ENTER button, or

«Press the TRIP button for more than approxi- mately 1.5 seconds.

4-8 Display screen, heater, air cond

CT FUEL ECONOMY AAuerage Fuel Economy

Press the TRIP button to display Average Fuel Economy and Distance To Empty.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset. The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the battery cables, the display will show (***).

ner, audio and phone systems

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0. Press the TRIP button repeatedly until the FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown, then ei- ther:

e_ Select the “Reset” key on screen by press- ing the ENTER button, or

e_ Press the TRIP button for more than approxi- mately 1.5 seconds.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The DTE is constantiy calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

e_Ifthe amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small, the display just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may con- tinue to be displayed

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to “Tire pressure information" later in this section.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to display the screen to change the maintenance interval.

Select the “Maintenance Schedule” key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set the maintenance interval.

Resetting the maintenance interval

The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte- nance intervals can be reset to O miles (kilome- ters).

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

MAINTENANCE NOTICE LHAO483

Displaying the maintenance notice re- minder

Select the “Display Maintenance Notification” key and press the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met:

To retum to the previous display after the MAIN- TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the BACK button:

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is tumed ON until one of the following conditions are met

e “Reset” key is selected.

“Display Maintenance Notification” is set to OFF.

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CE] TIRE PRESSURE 8:34 SET Ces Css 7 LHAO557

Tire pressure information

To display tire pressure information, press the TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE screen is displayed. Select the “Tire Pressure” key using the joystick and press the ENTER but- ton.

Pressure indication in * psi on the screen indi- cates that the pressure is being measured. After a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will be displayed random.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position:

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis- played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

e When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Con- tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

SETTINGS ET DISPLAY SETTINGS Display Brightness / Contrast / Map Background Vehicle Electronic Systems © Display Off System Settings Lower Display Setting Navigation @ Audio BHvac © Guidance Voice Guidance Volume -[NNNNN + LHA0558 | LHA0632 HOW TO USE THE SETTING Display settings

BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET- TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set.

Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER button. The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap- pear.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

DISPLAY SETTINGS Z ==

Select _the “Brightness/Contrast/Map Back- ground” key to adjust the brightness and contrast ofthe map background. Use the joystick to adjust the brighiness to darker or brighter and the con- trast to lower or higher.

Use the joystick to select the “Map Background” key. Press the ENTER button or move the joystick right or left to choose a “Dark” or “Bright” map background.

The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button.

4-12 Display screen, heater, air con

Select the “Display Off” key. The indicator of the “Display Off” turns amber and the message above will be displayed briefly. When the audio, HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode button on the control panel is operated, the dis- play turns on for that operation. If one of the control panel buttons is pressed, the display will not automatically turn off until that operation is finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto- matically after 5 seconds.

joner, audio and phone systems

To turn the screen on,

e Hold the #/2 button for approximately 2 seconds and the message “resuming dis- play" will appear and the “Display Off" key will be automatically turned on (no amber indicator).

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Lift Steering Column When Exiting Vehicle

Selective Door Unlock

Lower display setting:

You can choose to display the audio or HVAC (Heater and air conditioner) functions on the lower part of the display. Select the “Lower Dis- play Setting” key by using the joystick. Then se- lect the “Audio” or “HVAC' key using the joystick or by pressing the ENTER button.

The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button.

Any time audio information is shown on the main part of the screen, HVAC information will be displayed on the lower part of the screen. HVAC information will be shown even if “Audio” is se- lected to be displayed on the lower part of the screen.

Vehicle electronic systems

Select the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER but- ton. The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen will be displayed

You can set the following operating conditions by selecting the desired item using the joystick, then pressing the ENTER button. The indicator light, box at the left of the selected item, alternately tums on and off each time the ENTER button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON Indicator light is not iluminated — OFF Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS E3 VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS Keyiess Remote Response Lights

Return Al Setings to Defauk

Ce) RR iraligene Kay Lock Response - Sound rome Ceres a Sensiiey of Automalic Heedighte {le © inrsligene Key Unlock Response - Bcep Sound Autometie Heacdighs Of Delay Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock Function LEE 2 Q a Ÿ LHA0674 LHA0675)| LHAO0565)

Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle: With this option ON, the drivers seat automati- cally moves back and returns to the original po- sition for ease of exit and entry.

Lift steering column when exiting vehicle: With this option ON, the steering column auto- matically tilts up and returns to the original posi- tion for ease of exit and entry.

Selective door unlock: Select to change which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation:

Only the drivers door — All the doors

4-14 Display screen, heater, air con

Keyless remote response — horn: Select to turn on or tu off the horn chirp mode used when the LOCK button on the Intelligent Key is pressed.

If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the display screen will not show the current mode. Use the Intelligent Key to return to the previous mode and re-enable the dis- play screen control.

joner, audio and phone systems

Keyless remote response — lights: Select to turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key is pressed.

If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the mode will not be changed with the display. Use the Intelligent Key to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display control.

Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length of time before doors automatically re-lock.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Sens of automatic headlights: Select to change the sensitivity setting of the automatic headlights:

e_ Lower: less sensitive, automatic headlights will take longer to come on when the head- light sensor senses less ambient light.

e_ Higher: more sensitive, automatic headlights will come on quicker when the headlight sensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic headlights off delay: Select to change the setting for the length of time the automatic headlights remain on after exiting the vehicle.

Speed dependent wiper: Select to turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper function.

Intelligent Key lock response — sound: Se- lect to change the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when a request switch is pushed to lock the doors.

Select to turn off all sounds made when a request switch is pushed to lock the doors, by selecting the “OFF” key using the joystick.

Intelligent Key unlock response — beep sound: Select to turn on or turn off the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when a request switch is pushed to unlock the doors.

Intelligent Key lock/unlock function: Select to turn on or turn off the door lock and unlock modes used when a request switch is pushed.

Return all settings to default: Select to change all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS to their default settings.

SYSTEM SETTINGS Langusge/Unit

Select the “System Settings” key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The SYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed.

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressing the ENTER button

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG Metrie — km, °C, L/100 km

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

You can select the language and unit using the joystick or pressing the ENTER button.

The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button.

Dayight Saving Time:

Clock Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.

The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button.

joner, audio and phone systems

Setting daylight savings time:

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust the clock to daylight savings time.

ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour. OFF: The current time is displayed.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CLOCK SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS Hours 4 + Hours 4 + | 06.25 | | 06.25 | D D pres Cr) ce Dofight Sang Time Os Savrg Time pres LHA0567 LHAO0568 LHA0563

Adjusting the time to the GPS: Select the “Auto Adjust” key. The time will be reset to the GPS time.

Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key. The TIME ZONE screen will appear. °

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

2. Select one of the following zones, depend- ing on the current location.

After selection, the CLOCK SETTINGS screen will appear.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone has been set as the initial (default) setting.

With this option ON, a beep will sound if any audio button is pressed.

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- er's Manual for information regarding these set- tings.

Guidance voice settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- er's Manual for information regarding these set- tings.

#1> BUTTON To change the display brighiness, press the Xt/> button. Pressing the button again will change the display to “DAY” or “NIGHT" display. Then, adjust the brightness by moving the joy- stick right or left.

Ifno operation is done within 10 seconds, or ifthe BACK button is pressed, the display will return to the previous display.

VENTILATORS WHAOG686

Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilator slides.

Open or close the ventilators by using the dial. Move the dial toward the & to open the ven- tilators ortowardthe Æ to close them.

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

8. <> Aïrrecirculation button 9. Gp Rear window defroster switch 10. A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button 11. OFF button for climate control system

SDAHBGN The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running.

Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets Should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

+ Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.

e_Adijust the temperature display to about 75° F (24° C) for normal operation.

e_ The temperature of the passenger compart- ment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con- trolled automatically.

+ _A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

4-20 Display screen, heater, air con

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

8. You can individually set driver and front pas- senger side temperature using each tem- perature control dial. When the DUAL but- ton or passenger side temperature dial is tured, the DUAL indicator will come on. To turn off the passenger side temperature control, push the DUAL button.

The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be dis- played and A/C indicator will turn off.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

e_ The temperature of the passenger compart- ment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con- trolled automatically.

«Not recommended if windows fog up.

joner, audio and phone systems

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Pushthe Gÿ defroster button on. The in- dicator light on the button will come on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

e_ To quickly remove ice from the outside ofthe windows, set the fan speed to maximum.

e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.

© When the front defroster button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be tumed on at outside temperatures above 23°F (—5°C). The air recirculate mode auto- matically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control

Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the button will come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode.

Air flow control Pushing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet:

7 — Airflows from center and side ventilators.

+7 — Airflows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets.

+Ÿ — Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

% — Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

SZ — Airflows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off Press the OFF button.

+ When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera- ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

The sunload sensor, located on the top passen- gerside ofthe instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any- thing on or around this sensor.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth's ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re- quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi- tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni- cal and consumer information" section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ- mentally friendly" air conditioning system.

A WARNING The air conditioner system contains re- frigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner ser- vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment.

4-22 Display screen, heater, air con

AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and press the POWER/WVOLUME control knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, build ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- ences. intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- hicle may influence ra reception quality.

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- dio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in à moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These char- acteristics are completely normal in a given re- ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system

joner, audio and phone systems

Reception conditions will constantly change be- cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other ve- hicles can work against ideal reception. De- scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION Range: FM range is normal} limited to 25 — 30 miles (40 — 48 km), with monaural (single chan- nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is Within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter) static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo- mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also sub- ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. lt can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so equipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may

not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT" is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat- elite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal.

I possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Compact disc (CD) player

e Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD changer/player.

e Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

e Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time.

e Onlyuse high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.

e During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu- . If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.

e The player may skip while driving on rough roads.

e The CD player sometimes cannot func- tion when the compartment tempera- ture is extremely high or low. Decrease/increase the temperature before use.

Do not expose the CD to direct sun- light.

CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty, scratched or covered with finger- prints may not work properly.

The following CDs may not work prop- erly:

e Copy control compact discs (CCCD) e Recordable compact discs (CD-R) e Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc- tion:

e CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges

This audio system can only play pre- recorded CDs. It has no capability to record or burn CDs.

If the CD cannot be played, one of the following messages will be displayed.

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

e Confirm that the CI inserted cor- rectly (the label side is facing up, etc.).

This is an error due to excessive tem- perature inside the player. Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button. After a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal.

The file is unplayable in this audio sys- tem (only MP3 CD).

Compact Disc with MP3

e_MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most wel-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near “CD quality" sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn't hear.

Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.

Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.

ID3 tag — The ID3 tag is the part of the encoded MP3 file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, album title, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

Playback order chart

Playback order of the CD with compressed files (MP3) is as illustrated.

e_ The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Specification chart:

CD, CD-R, CD-RW Supported file systems

1509660 LEVEL1, IS09660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * 509660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512

Text character number limitation

Displayable character codes

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: {UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

“Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

4-26 Display screen, heater, air condi

ioner, audio and phone systems

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Troubleshooting guidi

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctiy. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Cannot play Check if there is condensation inside the player. f there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it retums to the normal temperature

Files with extensions other than “MPS", “mp3 or “wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing.

Hthere are many folders or file levels on the MP disc, or i it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips

The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc, might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed

Skipping with high bit rate files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the next song when playing

When a non-MP3 file has been given an extension of “MP3" or “mp3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

*No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed, and an XM® or SIRIUS" satel- lite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam.

11. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons

15. PRESET AB-C button *No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the RADIO button is pressed unless op- tional satellite receiver and antenna are installed, and an XM® or SIRIUS" satel- lite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A)CD CHANGER (Type B)

For all operation precautions, see "Audio opera- tion precautions” earlier in this section.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the RADIO button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed, and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat- elite radio not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Audio main operation POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then press the PWR/VOL control knob while the sys- tem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the PWR/WOL con- trol knob.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen- sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

d AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble, Fade, Balance, SSV, Beep and Language):

AUDIO button to change the

Press the à mode as follows:

Bass — Mid — Treble — Fade — Balance — Speed Sense Volume (if so equipped) — Beep ON/OFF — Language — Audio or OFF — Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press the + AUDIO button until the desired mode appears in the display. Press the TUNE button to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You

can also use the TUNE button to adjust Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LEVEL1 to LEVELS press the TUNE button left or right.

To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press the TUNE button left or right. This will enable or disable the beep sound heard during menu se- lection.

To change the Language to English or Français, press the TUNE button left or right

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the + AUDIO button re- peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati- cally reappear after about 5 seconds.

To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text, press the CLOCK DISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will allow you to scroll

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

through CD text as follows: Track number and Track time +— Album title — Song title.

e_ Album title displays the title of the CD being played.

MP3 display mode (Type B only)

To change the text displayed when listening to a CD with MP3s and ID3 tags, press the CLOCK DISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will scroll through the CD text as follows: Disc number, Track number and Folder number — Folder title +— Album title «— Artist name +— Song title.

e Disc number displays the number of the current disc playing

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Album title displays the title of the album of the song playing.

Artist name displays the name ofthe artist of the song playing.

+ Song title displays the title of the song play- ing. Display satellite radio display mode (if so equipped)

To change the text displayed when listening to satellite radio (if so equipped) press the CLOCK DISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will scroll through the broadcast information as follows: Channel number +—— Category name — Channel name +— Artist name —— Song title.

+ Channel number displays the channel num- ber of the selected satellite radio station.

+ Category name displays the category name of the selected satellite radio station.

+ Channel name displays the channel name of the selected satellite radio station.

e Song title displays the song title, show name, or temperature of the selected satel- lite radio station.

Pressing the CLOCK DISP button displays the clock with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK DISP button again to turn off the clock display.

For additional information on setting the clock, see “Adjusting the time” earlier in this section.

pause/mute button (Type A only):

To mute or pause the audio sound, press the X pause/mute button.

Press the button again to resume the audio sound.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the RADIO button will change the band as follows:

AM — FM <— SAT (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played.

No satellite radio reception is available when the RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and an- tenna are installed and an XM® or SIRIUS" sat- ellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio can only be installed in vehicles that were

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

factory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam. If satellite radio is not operational then the RADIO button is used to toggle between AM and FM bands.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pressed, the compact disc will auto- matically be tumed off and the last radio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio wi automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

« > TUNE (tuning) button:

To manually tune the radio, press the TUNE button Æ or .

To move quickly through the channels, press and hold eitherthe 4 or button

-@ >! SEEK (tuning) button:

Press the SEEK button or l forless than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broad- casting station.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Press the Æ SCAN button to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the button again during this 5 second period will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. fthe Æ SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next station

PRESET AB-C (Station memory opera- tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT (satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C preset button in any combination of FM, AM or SAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank À, B or C using the PRESET A:B-C select button

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station band.

8. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 — 6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air con

5. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

I the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur- rentiy, most RDS stations are in large cities, but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display: e_ Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”. e_ Station name, such as “The Groove”.

I the station broadcasts RDS information, the RDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation (ype À)

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the

joner, audio and phone systems

label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start play- ing.

H the radio is already operating, it will automati- cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

I the system has been tumed off while the com- pact disc was playing, pressing the POWER/WOLUME control knob will start the compact disc.

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radio will automatically be tumed off and the compact disc will start to play.

<« > TUNE (Rewind and Fast Forward) button:

When the TUNE button 4 or is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

When the SEEK button M is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the track being played returns to its beginning. Press M button several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go backthe number of times the button is pressed.

Whenthe SEEK button Bl is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the next track will start to play from its beginning. Press 1 button several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the num- ber of times the button is pressed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.)

MIX/RPT (mix and repeat) button:

When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattem can be changed as follows:

Repeat All — Repeat Track — Mix All Tracks —

Repeat AI Repeat AI: the entire disc will be repeated Repeat Track: the current track will be repeated Mix AII Tracks: all tracks will be played randomly

While listening to a CD, pressthe Æ SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD playing. Pressing the #

SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track.

CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX jack is located on the CD player. The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana- log audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.

Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX jack. A | CDEIECT:

Whenthe & buttonis pressed with the com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected.

When Æ button is pressed while the com- pact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off.

CDIN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Compact disc (CD) changer operation (Type B only)

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start play- ing. To insert the disc, first press the @ but- ton.

H the radio is already operating, it will automati- cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

I the system has been tumed off while the com- pact disc was playing, pressing the POWER button will start the compact disc.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs in the CD changer.

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the load button @ for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select button (1 — 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the load button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 — 6) will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will tu on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radio will automatically be tumed off and the compact disc will start to play.

<« > TUNE (Rewind and Fast Forward) button:

While playing a compact disc without MP3 press the TUNE button %Æ (rewind) or b (fast forward), the compact disc will play while rewind- ing or fast forwarding. When the button is re- leased, the compact disc will return to normal play speed.

(CAT-FOLDER) button: While playing an MP3, press the TUNE button Æ or to scan forward or back- ward through available folders.

To fast forward or rewind through an audio track, press the TUNE button 4% or D formore than 1.5 seconds.

When the SEEK button M is pressedforless than 1.5 seconds while a CD or MP3 CD is playing, the track or file being played returns to its beginning. Press M button several times to skip back through tracks or files. The CD or MP3 CD will go back the number of times the button is pressed.

When the SEEK button_»1__ button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while a CD or MP3 CD is playing, the next track or file will start to play from its beginning. Press 1 button several times to skip through tracks or files. The CD or MP3 CD will advance the number of times the button is pressed. When the last track or file on the CD or MP3 CD is skipped through, the first track or file will be played. there are multiple CDs in the CD changer, when the last track or file is skipped through, the next CD will start to play.

To play another CD that has been loaded, press a CD select button (1 — 6).

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while a compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows

Repeat All — Repeat Disc — Repeat Track — Mix

All Discs — Mix Disc — Repeat AI Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing wil be repeated.

Repeat Track: The track that is currently playing will be repeated

Mix AII Disc: Tracks from all discs will be played randomly.

Mix Disc: Tracks from the disc that is currently playing will be played randomiy.

Repeat AI: All discs will be played normally, with no special play pattern enabled.

When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while an MP3 compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

Repeat All — Repeat Disc — Repeat Folder — Repeat Track — Mix AI Disc — Mix Disc — Mix Folder —+ Repeat All

Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing wil be repeated.

Repeat Folder: The folder selected that is cur- rently playing will be repeated

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Repeat Track: The track that is currently playing will be repeated.

Mix All Disc: Tracks from all discs will be played randomly.

Mix Disc: Tracks from the disc that is currently playing will be played randomly.

Mix Folder: Tracks from that folder that is cur- rently accessed will be played randomly.

Repeat AI: All discs will be played normal}, with no special play patte enabled

While listening to a CD, press the Æ SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track. ZX | MP3 SCAN mode:

While listening to an MP3 CD, press the SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each file in the current folder, The scan will con- tinue on to the next folder and files if there is more than one folder on the MP3 CD. Pressing the Æ SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the MP3 CD remains in that folder.

CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX jack is located on the CD player. The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana- log audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.

Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX jack. A | CDEIECT:

urrent/Selected disc:

e Pressthe Æ button, then press the slot

number (1 — 6) for the desired disc. The compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num- ber (1 — 6) is pressed, the current loaded disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected disc: is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload.

e Press and hold the Æ button for more than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, orthe À button is pressed again during the eject sequence, the entire disc eject sequence will be can- celed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When this button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played.

The slot numbers (1 — 6) will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Æ CD eject button POWER/VOLUME control knob Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons TUNE/TRACK and AUDIO control knob (BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE, BAL- ANCE and SSV (if so equipped))

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER For all operation precautions, see "Audio opera- tion precautions” earlier in this section.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT" is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed, and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat- elite radio not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Audio main operation POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then press the PWR/VOL control knob while the sys- tem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the PWR/WOL con- trol knob.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen- sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE, FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as follows:

BASS —+ MID — TREBLE — FADE — BALANCE — SSV (if so equipped)

To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade and Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatediy until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- wise, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds.

DISP (display) button:

The DISP (display) button will show text about FM stations, CD or MP3 and SAT (satellite, if so equipped) information in the audio display.

To change the text displayed while listening to an FM station that broadcasts with Radio Data Sys- tem (RDS), press the DISP button. The DISP button will allow you to change RDS information as follows: Station call number — Program type — Station information — Station call number.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

For additional information, see “Radio data sys- tem (RDS)" later in this section.

To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows: Disc title, Track title —— Disc title —— Tracktitle.

e_ Disc title mode displays the title of the CD being played

To change the text displayed when listening to an MP3 with MP3 text (when CD with text is being used), press the DISP button. The DISP button will scroll through the CD text as follows: Folder title, Artist name, Track title «<—— Folder title — Artist name «— Track title.

To change the default display mode press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE appears on the display, then rotate the knob to select the following display modes: Disc number <— Folder number.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Once a display mode is selected press the AU- DIO knob again to store the setting.

Folder number mode displays the folder number and the file number of the folder currently being played.

«Disc number mode displays the number se- lected disc and the track that is currently being played.

Display satellite radio display mode (if so equipped)

4-38 Display screen, heater, air con

Channel name mode displays the channel name of the selected satellite radio station.

Name mode displays the name of the artist, host or weather condition of the selected satellite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the FM, AM or SAT radio select button will change the band to either FM, AM or SAT (satellite, if so equipped) radio stations.

When the FM, AM or SAT radio select button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when the POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressed on.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat- elite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam.

joner, audio and phone systems

I a compact disc is playing when the FM, AM or SAT radio select button is pushed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

«< Dh | TUNE/FOLDER-CAT (Tuning): To manually tune the radio, press the

TUNE/FOLDERCAT button 44 turn the tuning knob to right or left

To move quickly through the channels, hold either

the € or > button down for more than 1.5 seconds. ww” D1 | SEEK/TRACK (tuning) button:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button or b1 for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

To seek quickly through the channels, press and hold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5 seconds. When the button is released the radio will seek to the next broadcasting station.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

SCAN/RPT tuning button:

Press the SCAN/RPT button for more than 1.5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting station (AM, FM or SAT, if so equipped) for 5 seconds. Pressing the button again during this 5 second period will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN/RPT button is not pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next station.

PRESET AB-C (Station memory opera- tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT (satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C preset button in any combination of FM, AM or SAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank À, B or C using the PRESET A:B-C select button

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station band.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man- ner.

I the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS can display: © Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”. e_ Station name, such as “The Groove”.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the RDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

guided automatically into the slot and start play- ing. To insert the disc, first press the LOAD button.

H the radio is already operating, it will automati- cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

I the system has been tumed off while the com- pact disc was playing, pressing the POWER/WOLUME control knob will start the compact disc.

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select button (1 — 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 — 6) will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer.

When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com- pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

e While playing a CD press the 4 or > button, the CD plays at an in- creased speed while rewinding or fast for- warding through the current track being played. When the button is released the CD returns to normal play speed

e While playing an MPS, press the TUNE/FOLDER-CAT button 44 or P> to scan backward or fonward through avail- able folders.

© Press and hold the #4 or > button for more than 1.5 seconds while an MP3 CD is playing, the MP3 CD plays at an increased speed while rewinding or fast forwarding through the current track being played. When the button is released the MP3 CD returns to normal play speed

[HW] [ol] SEEK/TRACK button:

When the M button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the track being played returns to its beginning. Press

several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed.

When the Pl button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing, the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the number of times: the button is pressed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.)

To play another CD that has been loaded, press a CD select button (1 — 6).

When the SCAN/RPT play button is pushed while the compact disc is played, the play patte can be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT — 1 DISC RPT— 1 TRACK RPT

— ALL DISC RDM — 1 DISC RDM — ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT: Alldiscs loaded will be repeated. 1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will be repeated.

1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing will be repeated

ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be played randomly

4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur- rently playing will be played randomly

e Press the Æ button for less than 1.5 seconds. Then press one ofthe CD select (1 — 6) buttons for the selected CD to be ejected. If one of the CD select (1 — 6) buttons are not pressed within 1.5 seconds the current loaded CD will be ejected. If the disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload.

e Press and hold the Æ button for more than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, or the Æ button is pressed again during the eject sequence, the entire disc eject sequence will be can- celed.

When this button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played.

The slot numbers (1 — 6) wil illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

any standard analog audio input such as from a

| MODE | | PwR ] 4 —2) | LHA0683 LHA0049| WHA0611 AUX jack (if so equipped) CD CARE AND CLEANING Type À The AUX jack @ is located below the air condi- ®_ Handie a CD bits edges. Do notbendthe 1: Volume control switch tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack accepts disc. Never touch the surface of the disc. 2. MODE select switch 3. POWER onoff switch 4.

portable cassette tape player, MP3 player or

Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

when they are not being used.

A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

1 voL ne | [mg 4 A WHAO612

Type B Volume control switch Phone operation switch

POWER on and MODE select switch Tuning switoh

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel.

With the ignition key tumed to the ACC or ON position, push the POWER switch to turn the audio system on or off

SON Hyou have the Type B switch, with the ignition key tumed to the ACC or ON position push the MODE switch to tum the audio system on.

Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the following sequence: Preset À — Preset B — Preset C — CD* — AUX".

“This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.

“This mode is only available when a compatible auriary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

Volume control switch

Push the tuning switch( or ZX )forless than 1.5 seconds to change presets.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( VW or ZX ) for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ- ous radio station.

4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch N/_ or /N forless than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track. Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Pushthe SEEKtuningswitch 7 or ZX for more than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up or down.

ANTENNA Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

e Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor recep- tion or noise.

° When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following precautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.

e A cellular telephone should not be used

while driving so full attention may be en to vehicle operation. Some juris- ions prohibit the use of cellular tele- phones while driving.

e If you must make a call while your ve- hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- lar phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Ex- ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

e If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

À CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos- sible from the electronic control modules.

Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic con- trol system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.

Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.

Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.

For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM (if so equipped)

e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

e If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

ACAUTION To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner of a Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

4-44 Display screen, heater, air con

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in- vehicle phone module, no other phone connect- ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto- matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

joner, audio and phone systems

module when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the paired cellular phone tumed on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes.

e Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

e_ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom- mended phone list.

— Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser- vice area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a moun- tainous area.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.

When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person's voice during a call

Do not place the cellular phone in an area sur- rounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degrada- tion and wireless connection disruption.

While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones.

H the hande-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, please refer to “Troubleshooting guide” later in this section. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshoot- ing help.

Refer to the cellular phone Owners Manual re- garding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.

This device complies with Part 15 of the ECC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex- posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi- ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 8 inches (20 cm) between the radiator and your body. This Transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmit- ter.

USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Phone System.

Hthe vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the amber light on the overhead console illumi- nates and the system is ready to accept voice commandés. Ifthe f£ button is pressed before the initialization completes, the system will an-

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

nounce “Hands-free phone system not ready" and will not react to voice commands.

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly.

+ Waituntilthe tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command wil not be received properly.

e Speak in à natural voice without pausing between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press and release the {£ button located on the steering wheel. The light on the overhead con- sole flashes to signal you have entered a voice recognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The command given is picked up by the micro- phone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted.

e_ If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say “Help” and the system will repeat them.

e_ la command is not recognized, the system announces, “Command not recognized. Please try again.” Repeat the command in a clear voice.

e_lf you want to go back to the previous com- mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc- tion" any time the system is waiting for a response

© You can cancel a command when the sys- tem is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, à double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.

ef you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, press the volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob.

4-46 Display screen, heater, air con

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands, Refer to the following rules and examples.

— “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”, or

— “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh"

e Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”,

— NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred, and

— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred

Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The system will prompt you to continue en- tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200 — “One eight oh oh" joner, audio and phone systems

The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

— “One five five five one two one two star one two three"

For best results, say phone numbers as single digits.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands- Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel d£ PHONE/SEND Press the f£ _ button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming cal.

You can also use the f£ button to skip through system feedback and to enter commands during a call. See “List of voice commands” and “During a call” later in this section for more information.

MO25 PHONE/END Press the MODE button to cancel a VR session or end a call.

GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad- ditional command options, refer to “List of voice commands” later in this section.

You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following

1. Press and hold the f£ button for more than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press the PHONE/SEND (f£ ) button for the hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END (MORE ) button to select a dif- ferent language."

3. Pressthe MODE button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode" later in this section.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

4. The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan- guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in French). Use the following chart to select the language.

NOTE: Note: You must press the f£ button or

the MODE button within 5 seconds to change the language. MODE Current Press fé Press MODE language (PHONE/SEND) | (PHONE/END) gag to select to select English Spanish French Spanish English French French English Spanish

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

5. If you decide not to change the language, do not press either button. After 5 seconds, the VR session will end, and the language will not be changed

The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu “Setup” @ “Pair phone” (E) “New phone” © Initiate from handset (B) Name phone (©) Assign priority (©) Choose ringtone @)

1. Press the f£ button on the steering wheel. The system announces the available commands.

2. Say: “Setup” @). The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commandés.

4-48 Display screen, heater, air con

3. Say: “Pair phone” (®). The system acknowl- edges the command and announces the next set of available commande.

4. Say: “New phone" ©). The system acknowl- edges the command and asks you to initiate pairing from the phone handset O).

The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. See the cellular phone Owner's Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc- tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel- lular phones.

When prompted for a PIN code, enter “1234" from the handset. The PIN code «1234" has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed.

5. The system asks you to say a name for the phone

H the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again:

Also, if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name already used, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

joner, audio and phone systems

6. The system asks you to assign a priority level ®. The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Bluetooth® phone is in the vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the system or refer to “Setup” later in this section for more information on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to select a custom ring tone @. Follow the instruc- tions provided by the system or refer to “Setup” later in this section for more infor- mation on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phone number

“Cal” ® Number (speak digits) (6) “Dia” ©

1. Pressthe /£ button on steering wheel. À tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” @. The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

8. Say the number you wish to call ®). For example, 555-1212 can be said as “five five five one two one two.” See “How to say numbers" earlier in this section for more information.

4. When you have finished speaking the phone number, the system repeats it back and an- nounces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial” ©). The system acknowledges the command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List of voice commands” later in this section.

When you hear the ring tone, press the f£ button on the steering wheel

Once the call has endedi press the MODE button on the steering wheel. NOTE:

1f you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone, press the MODE button on the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List of voice commands” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu “Call” “Phone Book" “Memo Pad" “Setup”

When you press and release the f£ button on the steering wheel, you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu. The following pages describe these commands and the com- mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before Speaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response.

I you want to end an action without completing it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the system is waiting for a response. The system will end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a response.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When you get used to the menus in the system, you can talk ahead by saying more than one command at a time. For example, say, “Call five five five one two one two" or “Memo pad record."

Also, when you get used to the system re- sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by pressing the /£ button on the steering wheel. However, if you press the #4 button when the system is waiting for a response from you it will end the VR session.

“Call” Main Menu “Cal” Name (speak name) @ Number (speak digits) 6) “Redial!' © “Call Back” ©)

Name (speak name) (À)

I you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you can dial a number associated with a name and location.

See “Phone book” later in this section to learn how to store entries.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

When prompted by the system, say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call. The system acknowledges the name.

Hthere are multiple locations associated with the name, the system asks you to choose the loca- tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location, the system begins the call.

Number (speak digits)

When prompted by the system, say the number you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers" and “Making a call by entering a phone number" earlier in this section for more details.

Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed within the vehicle.

The system will not redial the last number dialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re- peats the number and begins dialing

H a redial number does not exist, the system and

announces, “There is no number to redial ends the VR session

4-50 Display screen, heater, air con

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re- peats the number and begins dialing.

I a call back number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to call back" and ends the VR session.

During a call there are several command options available. Press the {£ button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com- mands.

e_ “Help” — The system announces the avail- able commands.

e “Go back/Correction” — The system an- nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session and returns to the call.

e “Send/Enter/Cal/Dia!” — Use the Send command to enter numbers during a call. For example, if you were directed to dial an ex- tension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four."

joner, audio and phone systems

The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers, The system then ends the VR ses- sion and returns to the call.

e_ “Transfer call" — Use the Transfer Call com- mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call transferred to privacy mode." The system then ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com- mand again to return to a hands-free call through the vehicle.

e _“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it. Use the mute command again to unmute your voice.

If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset to “off” for the next call so the other party can hear your voice.

Phone book commands are not available when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu “Phone Book” “New Entry" @ “Edit" “Delete” ©

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each phone paired with the system. Each name can have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ- ated with it.

Each phone has its own separate phone book. You cannot access Phone A's phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B.

Use the New Entry command to store a new name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name you would like to give the new entry. For example, say: “Mary.”

I the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name already stored, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and you confirmit is correct, the system asks for a location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other). For example, say: “Home." The system acknowledges the location and asks for a number. For example, say: ‘five five five one two one two." See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section for more information. The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers, choose “Store."

The system confirms the name, location and number. The system then asks if you would like to store another location for the same name. If you do not wish to store another location, the system ends the VR session.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

«Edit” © Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone

book entry or to add a 2nd, 8rd or 4th phone number to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name of the entry you wish to edit

The system acknowledges the name and asks you for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location. The system ac- knowledges and asks you for the phone number you would like to store with this location.

See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section for more information.

The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers, choose “Store."

The system confirms the name, location and

number, then announces that the entry has been stored. The system then ends the VR session

Use the Delete command to erase one entry from the phone book, all entries from the phone book, the current redial number or the current call back number.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

To delete entries from the phone book, say a name or “Al entries” when prompted by the sys- tem.

The system acknowledges the command and asks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call back number, say “redial number” or “call back num- ber" when prompted by the system.

Ha redial number or a call back number exists, the system deletes them without asking for confirma- tion.

Ifthere is no number for the entry you are trying to delete, the system says so and ends the VR session:

Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. When the playback of the list is complete, the system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the MODE button on the steering wheel. The system ends the VR session.

4-52 Display screen, heater, air con

Main Menu “Memo Pad” “Record” @ “Play” ©) “Delete" ©

The Memo Pad records à maximum of 3 voice memos, each up to 20 seconds long.

The system announces “Recording” and a tone sounds, signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly. When you are done, press the f£ or MODE button on the steering wheel

A tone sounds and the system announces “Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end the VR session.

Ifthe memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish to record over the oldest memo.

The system plays back all the memos in the order of newest to oldest. The system ends the VR session.

joner, audio and phone systems

there are no memos recorded, the system an- nounces “No messages to play." The system ends the VR session.

The Delete command erases all memos. The system asks you to confirm this action before deleting all memos.

“Pair Phone" @ “List Phone” ©) “Select Phone" ©) “Change Priority" ©) “Delete Phone” ©) “Select Ringtone” (©) “Bluetooth Off” ©

Use the Setup command to change options as- sociated with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

ng procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled. Also, see “Pairing procedure” earlier in this section

Up to 5 phones can be paired. f you try to pair a sixth phone, the system announces that you must first delete one phone or replace an existing phone.

H you try to pair a phone that has already been paired to your vehicle's system, the system an- nounces the name the phone is already using. The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from the following commands:

e_ “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone” earlier in this section.

e_ “Replace phone” — The system announces the names ofthe phones already paired and asks which you would like to replace

Once you say the name of the phone you wish to replace, the pairing procedure will begin. Refer to “Paiing procedure” earlier in this section.

e_ “List phone" - See the description below. “List phone”

Use the List Phone command to hear the names of the phones currently paired. If no phones are paired, the system announces, “No paired phones to list.” The system then ends the VR session.

Use the Select Phone command to select a phone of lesser priority when two or more phones paired with Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone and confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selected phone remains active until the ignition switch is turmed OFF or you select a new phone.

“Change priority” (P)

Use the Change Priority command to change the priority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is ac- tie when more than one paired Bluetooth® phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 8, 4, 5).

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

I the new priority level is already being used for another phone, the two phones will swap priority levels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone A Priority Level 2 = Phone B Priority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C to Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C Priority Level 2 = Phone B Priority Level 3 = Phone À

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phones already paired with the system and their priority level. The system then gives you the option to delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the list again.

Once you chose to delete a phone or all phones, the system asks you to confirm this action

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

When you delete a phone, the associated phone book for that phone will also be deleted.

“Select ringtone” (F)

Use the Select Ringtone command to select the tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is received.

The system announces the name of the active phone and asks you to choose from the following commandés:

e_ “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone and asks if you would like to select that tone. I you say “No”, the system plays the next ringtone available and continues to cycle through the ringtones until you select one or quit.

e_ “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm your wish to disable the ringtone.

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

When the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem is off, you will not be able to make or receive calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you will not have access to the Phone Book.

4-54 Display screen, heater, air con

You can still use the Memo Pad and access Setup.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of- dialect users to train the system to improve rec- ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of commands, the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system. The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for memory À and memory B.

H memory À is available, the system will use memory À to store the model. If memory À is in use and memory B is available, the system wil use memory B to store the model. If both of the memory locations are in use, the system will ask the user to select which memory location should be overwritten.

Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver's seat with the engine run- ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis- sion in P (Park).

8. Press and hold the f£ than 5 seconds.

joner, audio and phone systems

The system announces: “Press the PHONE/SEND (f£ ) button for the hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END (MODE ) button to select a dif- ferent language.°

For information on selecting a different lan- guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier in this section.

Voice memory À or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory locations are already in use, the system will prompt you to overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro- vided by the system:

When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin, the press the f£ button.

The SA mode will be explained. Follow the instructions provided by the system.

When training is finished, the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded.

The system will ask you to say your name. Follow the instructions to register your name.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

11. The system will announce that speaker ad- aptation has been completed and the sys- tem is ready,

The SA mode will stop if:

e The f£ buttonis pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode.

e_ The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

e_ The ignition switch is tumed to the OFF or LOCK position.

During the SA mode, the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases. (The system will prompt you for each phrase.)

+ phone book new entry © dial three oh four two nine

phone book delete entry memo pad record

dial star two one seven oh Yes

dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on

setup change priority

call three one nine oh two

nine seven pause pause three oh eight

Cancel call back number

call star two zero nine five delete phone

dial eight three zero five one

four three pause two nine pause zero

delete redial number

e_ call five six two eight zero

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctiy to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are en- countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

System fails to interpret the command correctiy.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commandks" earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

8. Speak cleariy without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle

4, Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: fi is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. f more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im- prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earier in this section.

The system consistentiy selects the wrong entry from the phone book,

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the “List Names" command. See “Phone book" earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-56 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. … Increasing fuel economy.…5-16 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) Parking/parking on hills. ..5-17 Three-way catalyst. . Power steering.… 5-18 Tire pressure monitoring system MS - Brake system . 5-18 Avoiding collision and rollover. . Brake precautions . 5-18 Drinking aleohol/drugs a and drving Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). ...5-19

Ignition switch. . ecse Traction control system (TCS) (if so equipped)5-20 Intelligent Key System. . Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system Ignition switch positions . (if so equipped) ..5-21 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system Rear sonar system (if so equipped) .… 5-22

Before starting the engine Cold weather driving.….….… ..5-28

Freeing a frozen door lock... Anti-freeze. Battery… Draining of coolant water. Tire equipment . . Special winter equipment. . .5-24 Driving on snow or ice . 5-24 Engine block heater (f so equipped).…… .5-25

Starting the engine Driving the vehicle . . . Cortiueusb Variable Transmission (CVT) Parking brake . Cruise control. Precautions on cruise control. Cruise control operations. Break-in schedule

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING A WARNING

e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

e Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- ous. lt can cause unconsciousness or death.

5-2 Starting and driving

e If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all dows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

+ Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.

+ Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.

e Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compart- ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the © air recirculation but- ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air.

e If electrical wiring or other cable con- nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommen- dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- try into the vehicle.

The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger compartiment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, un- derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are bumed at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

e The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- tem are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.

e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re- duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

e Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- tion: the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- able loss of performance or other un- usual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer.

e Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.

e Do not race the engine while warming it up.

e Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and in- flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (I your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger ilumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telitale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alter- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac- ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Additional information:

e_ The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres- sure of the spare tire.

e_ The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25

Starting and driving 5-3

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

e_ The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

e_ Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi- nate. If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature, check the tire pres- sure for all four tires.

You can also check the pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen (if so equipped). The order of the tire pres- sure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position. See “Tire pressure information” in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio and phone systems” section

5-4 Starting and driving

For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls" section and “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)" in the “In case of emergency” section:

e If the low tire pressure wart illuminates while driving, avoi steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres- sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section for changing a flat tire.)

+ When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

«+ Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

e Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol re sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

A CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu- minate.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

— Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

— If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.

— If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user’s authority to op- erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause undes- ired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER A WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any ve- hicle, loss of control could result in a colli- sion with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescrip- tion or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as out- lined in the “Safety - Seats, seat belts and supple- mental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING A WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re- duces coordination, delays reai and impairs judgement. Dri drinking alcohol of being involved in an accident inj g yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohot-related accidents. Al- though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre- Scription, and illegal drugs). Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco- hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

IGNITION SWITCH A WARNING Never turn the tion knob to the LOCK

il ng. The steering wheel lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

5-6 Starting and driving

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK until the selec- tor lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When turning the ignition switch, make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) position

Ithe selector lever is not returned to the P (Park) position, the ignition switch cannot be moved toward LOCK.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to- ward the LOCK position while keeping the Intel- ligent Key, proceed as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position.

2. Tu the ignition switch slightly in the ON direction.

8. Turn the key toward the LOCK position

The selector lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is il the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC, although it does not show on the lock cylinder, When the ignition is in OFF the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a tum counterclock- wise from the straight up position:

To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignitio Switch to the LOCK position. To unlock the steering wheel, push the ignition switch in and turn it gently while rotating the steer- ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the battery of the vehicle equipped with the Intelligent Key system is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK position, even using the me- chanical key.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS Push in the ignition switch to the ®) position when you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking posi

The ignition switch can only be locked in the LOCK position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed in, and turned to the ACC position ©) while carrying the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories) (©) :

This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) () :

This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories.

This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the knob immediately. It will automatically retum to the ON position:

The ignition switch cannot be tumed back to the LOCK position unless the selector lever is in the P (Park) position. (It can be turned only to the (8) position.)

À CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition si h in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended pe- riod. This can discharge the battery.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Tum the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 sec- onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

Hthe no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

e Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.

Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.

e_ Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.

Lock all doors. + Position seat and adjust head restraints. e_Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

e_ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.

Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (3) position. See “Waring/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

5-8 Starting and driving

. Apply the parking brake.

Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector lever is in any of the driving positions.

. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition switch to START. Release the switch when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

© the engine is very hard to start in ex- tremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap- proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank the engine. Release the switch and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accel- erator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turn- ing the ignition switch to START. Release the switch when the engine starts. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

A CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec- ondés after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-8 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

DRIVING THE VEHICLE CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)

e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Fail- ure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.

e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

e Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident.

A CAUTION When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress- ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con- trolled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically re- duced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector lever into a driving gear.

8. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion:

4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

The CVT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

Starting and driving 5-9

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector lever from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

A WARNING Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

5-10 Starting and dr

If the ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or any drive position, the key cannot be turned to LOCK and be removed from the ignition switch. Additionally, the selector lever cannot be moved to R (Reverse) from N (Neutral) or any drive position for about 3 minutes after the igni- tion switch is turned to the ACC or OFF position The selector lever can be moved from R (Re- verse) to P (Park) with the key in the OFF or ACC position. If this occurs, perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped.

2. Turn the key to the ON position. 8. Depress the foot brake pedal.

4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre- ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni- tion key to the LOCK position to remove the key.

Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the se- lector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then shift the selector lever into the P (Park) position.

ACAUTION Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

When the selector lever is shifted from D to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu- all.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis- played on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: Mi M2 + M3 «— M4 — M5 «— M6 M6 (Gth):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downtill grades.

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

+ Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M6 range. This reduces fuel economy.

Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)

Move the selector lever to the — (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.)

Moving the selector lever to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession. How- ever, if this motion is rapidly done, the second shifting may not be completed properly.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Return the selector lever to the D (Drive) position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode.

+ _Inthe manual shift mode, the transmis- n may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving perfor- mance and reduces the chance of ve- hicle damage or loss of control.

e In the manual shift mode, the transmis- sion may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission auto- matically shifts down. The transmission shifts to M1 (1st) gear before the vehicle comes to a complete stop. When accel- erating again, it is necessary to shift up to the desired range.

e When the CVT fluid temperature is ex- tremely low, the manual shift mode may not work and automatically shift as a drive mode. This is not a malfunction. In this case, return the selector lever to D (Drive) and drive for a while and then shift to the manual shift mode.

e_ When the OVT fluid temperature is high, the shift range may upshift in lower rpm than usual. This is not a malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-11

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Ifthe battery is discharged, the shift selector lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shift lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved ifthe battery is discharged.

5-12 Starting and driving

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as shown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu- tral) position while holding down the shift lock release.

6. Tum the key to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location

Hthe shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans- mission as soon as possible.

A WARNING If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunction- ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift — in D (Drive) position and manual shift mode —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel- erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis- sion down into lower range, depending on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection mode

This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature be- comes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con- ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated, see “Malfunction indicator light

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

(MIL)” in the “instrument and controls” sec- tion. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then turn the switch back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operat- ing condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.

A WARNING When the high fluid temperature protec- tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially care- ful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal op- eration, or have it repaired if necessary.

PARKING BRAKE A WARNING

e Be sure the parking brake is fully re- leased before di g. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.

e Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.

e Do notuse the gear shi place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

+ Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

To engage: Pull the lever up @. To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position.

8. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightiy, push the button and lower com- pletely ®.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake waming light goes out.

Starting and driving 5-13

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

light in the instrument panel then blinks to wam the driver.

e_lfthe SET indicator light blinks, tum the cruise control switch off and have the sys- tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

5-14 Starting and dr

e_ The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control switch is tumed ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, use the following proce- dures.

A WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:

e When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.

e On winding or hilly roads. © On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). © In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be- tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru- ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

e_ To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- celerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.

e_ The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods.

e_ Pushthe CANCEL button; the SET indicator light in the instrument panel goes out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods.

e Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de- sire, release the switch

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods.

e_Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- hicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it.

+ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re- lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.

+ Push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed de- creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re- lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re- turns to the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE A CAUTION During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en- sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short- ened engine life and reduced engine performance.

Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

Starting and driving 5-15

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position.

Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other ve- hicles.

Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible.

Avoid unnecessary engine idling Keep your engine tuned up.

Follow the recommended periodic mainte- nance schedule.

Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres- sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im- proper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.

5-16 Starting and driving

When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

Use the recommended viscosity engine oil See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda- tion” in “Technical and consumer informa- tion” later in this manual.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may and cause a fire.

e Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Fail- ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re- sult in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

+ Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

+ Donotleave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position.

8. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, itis a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: () Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

Tum the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB: ©

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen- ter of the road if it moves.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- tion and remove the key.

Starting and driving 5-17

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

POWER STEERING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

H the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in Sharp turns and at low speeds.

A WARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off whi driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

5-18 Starting and driving

BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. I one circuit malfunctions, you wil stil have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. lf the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis- tance will be longer.

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down à slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

+ While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel- erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

e is not running or is turned g, the power assist for il not work. Braking will be

When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctiy.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

e The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a sophisticated device, but it cannot pre- vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help mai vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remem- ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis- tances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon- sible for safety.

type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.

- When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.

— When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. See “Ti and Loading Information label” in the “Technical and consumer informa- tion” section of this manual.

- For detailed information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip- pery surfaces.

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De- press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper- ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

A WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc- tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

H the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH(5 = 10 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-19

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap plies and releases hydraulic pressure.

This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is oper- ating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving,

Starting and driving

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) (if so equipped)

When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire may spin or slip. With the vehicle traction control system (TCS), sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability while accelerating.

e_lfthe slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is un- der slippery conditions. Be sure to drive carefully. See “Slip indicator light” and “Trac- tion control system (TCS) off indicator light" in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual

e If a malunction occurs in the system, the SsLip and @Ë indicator lights come on in the instrument panel.

As long as these lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The vehicle will behave like a vehicle without the system.

e The traction control system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur- faces and always drive carefully.

e If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- dard equipment or are extremely dete- riorated, the traction control system may not operate properly and the nr indicator light may come on.

+ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock ab- sorbers, struts, springs and bushings are not standard equipment or are ex- tremely deteriorated, the traction con- trol system may not operate properly and the nr indicator light may come on.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e When driving on extremely inclined sur- faces such as higher banked corners, the traction control system may not op- erate properly and the indicator light may come on. Do not drive on these types of roads.

If wheels or tires other than the recom- mended ones are used, the traction control system may not operate prop- erly and the nr indicator light may come on.

e Thetraction control system is not a sub-

stitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur- faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability.

When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system is operating, the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks.

e_ If the slip indicator blinks, the road condi- tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions. See “Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In- struments and controls” section:

the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic control system OFF using the VDC OFF switch, VDC functions will be tumed off. The VDC sys- tem will still try to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to one with more traction when the VDC system switch is OFF. The Slip indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS will still operate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working prop- erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

e The vehicle dynamic control system is designed to help improve driving stabil- ity but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur- faces and always drive carefully.

Starting and driving 5-21

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- dard equipment or are extremely dete- riorated, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly and the vehicle dynamic control off indica- tor light may come on.

e Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock ab- sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars and bushings are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are extremely dete- riorated the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the VDC OFF indica- tor light may come on.

«+ When driving on extremely inclined sur- faces such as higher banked corners, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on. Do not drive on these types of roads.

e When g on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

5-22 Starting and driving

+ If wheels or tires other than the recom- mended ones are used, the vehicle dy- namic control system may not operate properly and the vehicle dynamic con- trol off indicator light may come on.

e The vehicle dynamic control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

+ Always turn and look back before back- ing up. The RSS is not a substitute for proper backing procedures.

+ Read and understand the limitations of the rear sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may af- fect the function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

e This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob- jects to help avoid damaging the ve- hicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

e If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis- aligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measure- ment of obstacles or false alarms.

The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone to war the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the shift selector is in R (Reverse). The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet (1.8 m) from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is less than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound continuously. Ifthe RSS detects a station- ary or receding object further than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone

will sound for only three seconds. Once the sys- tem detects an object approaching, the tone will sound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when the shift selector lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON. The RSS OFF switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, the ignition must be ON, and the shift selector lever in R (Reverse). An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off. Ifthe indicator light iluminates when the RSS is not tumed off, it may indicate a failure in the RSS.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will affect the accuracy of the RSS.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de- icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so equipped)

ANTI-FRÉEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem- perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY Hthe battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi- mum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main- tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Starting and driving 5-23

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER I the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see “Changing engine coolant”in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SUMMER tres have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave- ment. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom- mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability informa- tion.

.… For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some US states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

5-24 Starting and dr

8. Tire chains may be used. For details, see “Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it- yourself" section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:

e_A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.

e_A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

e_ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowsdrifts.

DRIVING ON SNOW ORICE A WARNING

e Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

Whatever the condition, drive with cau- tion. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.

Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of seen ahead, brake before reach- Try not to brake while on the ice, avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

Do not use the cruise control on slip- pery roads.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

e Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se- riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

e Disconnect and properly store the en- gine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.

e Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex- tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

Engine block heaters are available through

NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature

starting. The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater:

. Turn the engine off. 2.

Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.

. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3 wire, 8 pronged extension cord

. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110- volt AC (VAC) outlet.

.… The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.

.… Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-

erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts:

Starting and driving 5-25

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

5-26 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPM Changing a flat tire

6-2 .... 6-2 .. 6-2 6-7 .. 6-9

I your vehicle overheats .

Towing your vehicle... ee Towing recommended by NISSAN …… Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres- sure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti- vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer to “Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire pressure information” in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio and phone sys- tems” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- tem (TPMS)" in the “Starting and driving” section.

6-2 In case of emergency

e If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal inj! for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres- sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

e When aspare js mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

ing tires with those not originally by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

e Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE I you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be- low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park)

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person- nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the CVT is shifted into P (Park).

+ Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.

e Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for profes- sional road assistance.

Place suitable blocks (D at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire © to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

A WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and spare tire cover. Remove the jack (D and wheel nut wrench (2) from the tool box. Remove the spare tire.

In case of emergency 6-3

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Jack-up point and placing jack

In case of emergency

Type B Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

+ Never get under the vehicle supported only by the jack. I essary to work under the vehicle, sup- port it with safety stands.

e Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.

Never use blocks on or under the jack.

Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.

Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc- tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm and level ground.

8. Toliftthe vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re- move the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

In case of emergency 6-5

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See speci structions under the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be- tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts altemately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight.

6-6 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated (@, ®), ©), ©),

e Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.

+ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.

e Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve- hicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque: 80 ft-Ib (108 N-m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recom- mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adijust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure, the display (if so equipped) of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pres- sure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because the tire pressure increases as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system mal- function.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip- ment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se- cured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

e The spare tire is designed for emer- gency use. See specific instructions un- der the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be fol- lowed.

e If done incorrectiy, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.

e Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.

+ Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor- rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, imme- diately flush the contacted area with water.

e Keep battery out of the reach of children.

e The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

+ Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.

e Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause se- rious injury.

e Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

In case of emergency 6-7

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Vehicle with Z WCE0054|

A WARNING Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage to

the charging system and cause personal

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their bat- teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se- lector lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnec- essary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

6-8 In case of emergency

. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-

e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com- partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve- hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en- gine of the vehicle being jump started.

A CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon- nect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

PUSH STARTING Do not start the engine by pushing

A CAUTION CVT models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps.

+ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.

Do not open the hood if steam is com- ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park)

Do not stop the engine.

2. Tum off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

8. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or cool- ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

A WARNING If steam or water is coming from the en- gine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the en- gine.

A WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high.

In case of emergency 6-9

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool- ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer.

6-10 In case of emergency

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. incorrect towing equipment could dam- age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail- able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera- tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:

e Never ride in a vehicle that is being

+ Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

+ When towing, make sure that the trans- mission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.

e Always attach safety chains before towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing" in the “Technical and consumer information" sec- tion of this manual.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

SCEO199A TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

+ Never tow CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. [fit is nec- essary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.

+ When towing with the front wheels on towing dollies:

— Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ignition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism.

hift lever to the N ne

+ When towing CVT models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake.

In case of emergency 6-11

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

A WARNING + Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

e Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

6-12 In case of emergency

+ Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.

+ Do notuse the vehicle tie downs to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks.

e Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at an angle.

e Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the sus- pension, steering, brake or cooling systems.

+ Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.

H your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn offthe Vehicle Dynamic Control System (if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

8. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back- ward.

Appiy the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.

Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

e Do not spin the tires above 85 mph (55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior Cleaning interior..…7-4 Washing Floor mats 7-5 Waxing.… Seat belts ….. 7-5 Removing spots … Corrosion protection. ue Lee T8 Underbody Most common factors contributing to vehicle Glass . Gorrosion 7-6 Aluminum alloy wheels . Environmental factors influence the rate of Chrome parts COTOSION 7-6 Tire dressings.… To protect your vehicle from corrosion . 7-6

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve- hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can:

e_ after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.

e_ after driving on coastal roads.

when contaminants such as soot, bird drop- pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface.

when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

7-2 Appearance and care

+ Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, espe- cially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

e Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical deter- gents, gasoline or solvents.

+ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- light or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

e Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughiy with plenty of clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regulary. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.

e Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un- derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- riod and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean ifthe high-mounted stop light is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light @ Push toward rear of vehicle. @ Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

A CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electri cal conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp- ened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

A CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid Staining or discoloring the wheels:

e Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.

Appearance and care 7-3

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as am- bient temperature.

+ Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non- abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub- ber. lfa tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:

+ Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat- ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an oil-based tire dressing,

7-4 Appearance and care

e_Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).

e_ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com- pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

e_Alow the tire dressing to dry as recom- mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp- ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu- facturers recommendations. Some fabric pro- tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.

+ Never use benzine, thinner or any simi- lar material.

e Small particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and Should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- gents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s natural finish.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

+ Never use fabric protectors unless rec- ommended by the manufacturer.

e Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam- age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex- tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they be- come excessively worn.

WAI0006)| Floor mat positioning aid (driver's side only)

This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your ve- hicle model. The driver's side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance" in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen- tal restraint system" section of this manual.

A WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

Appearance and care 7-5

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION

«The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

+ Damage to paint and other protective coat- ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve- hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

7-6 Appearance and care

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro- sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler- ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel- erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION

+ Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean

+ _ Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.

e_ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.

e NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de- bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

e Never allow water or other liquids to com contact with electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro- sion, which may be required in some areas, con- sult a NISSAN dealer.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

8 Maintenance and do-

Maintenance requirements. General maintenance . Explanation of general maintenance items Maintenance precautions.… . Engine compartment check locations … Engine cooling system .… . Checking engine coolant level Changing engine coolant. Engine oil. Checking engine oil level . Changing engine oil . Changing engine oil filter .

Continuously Variable Transmission (Un fluid .

Power steering fluid. … Brake fluid... Brake fluid . Window washer fluid . Window washer fluid reservoir Battery Jump starting Drive belts . Spark plugs. Replacing spark plugs .

Air cleaner … . In-cabin microfiter Windshield wiper blades .… Cleaning Replacing Brakes . Self-adjusting brakes . Brake pad wear indicators . Fuses .… ee Engine compartment. eee Passenger compartment … Battery replacement .… Intelligent Key battery Lights … Headights.……. Exterior and interior lights. Wheels and tires Tire pressure... Tire labeling. Types of tires. Tire chains.… Changing wheels and tires

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some daÿ-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS- SAN's good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance.

I is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide." You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day op- ration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- eration. lt is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualiied technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be per- formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptiy. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau- tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with “*” is found later in this sec:

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequentiy

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If neces- sary, adjust the pressure in all tres, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components Replace the grom- met seal, valve core and cap of the transmitter in vehicles equipped with TPMS at every tire re- placement or when reaching the wear limit of the tires.

Wheel alignment and balance [f the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a Straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. Ifthe steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam- aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when per- forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve- hicle, etc.

Additional information on the following items with an “*”’ is found later in this sec- tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera- tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur- ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera- tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. I the parking brake needs adjustment, see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

and are installed securely. Check the belt web- bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer- ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out ofthe defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel)

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve- hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected imme- diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc. that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex- posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thor- oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See the “Appearance and care” section of this manual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precau- tions which should be closely observed.

e Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park).

+ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.

+ Never leave the engine or automatic

on related component har-

nesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

e Never connect or disconnect the battery

always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

If you must work with the engine run- ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.

It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.

Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.

If you must run the engine in an en- closed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.

Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is neces- Sary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

Keep smoking materials, flame and Sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.

On gasoline engine models with the multiport fuel injection (MFI) system, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

+ Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

+ Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. AI- ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail- able. See “Owner's Manual/Service Manual or- der information” in the “Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplet or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS WDI0525

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil filer cap

Brake fluid reservoir

.. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 12.

Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE: Engine cover removed for clarity.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filed at the factory with Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti- freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

+ Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “If your vehicle overheats” found in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

The radiator is equipped with a pres- sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- gine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

À CAUTION When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti- freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors, such as or- ange, may damage the engine cooling system.

Outside temperature Genuine | Demineral- down to NISSAN ized or dis- Long Life | tilled water — = Antifreeze/ c F Coolant or equivalent -35 -30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level

If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat- ing.

+ To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the en- gine is hot.

e Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.

e Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

e Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Parkthe vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re- insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and L (Low) marks (®). This is the normal oper- ating oil level range. K the oil level is below the L (Low) mark (@), remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill ©.

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

À CAUTION Oil level should be checked regular; erating the engine with an insuffi amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

… Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off

. Remove the oil filler cap @ by turning it

. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

. Remove the drain plug ®) with a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.

I the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See “Changing engine oil filter” later in this section.

e Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

e Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

+ Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

e Waste oil must be disposed of prop- erly.

e Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer, Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 - 29 ft-Ib (29 - 39 N-m)

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filer opening, then install the oil filer cap securely.

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con- sumer information” section of this manual for drain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re- quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

8-10 Maintenance and do

WDI0495 CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Parkthe vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Tum the engine off. 3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter @).

4. Loosen the oil filter (@) with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by tuning it by hand.

À CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag

Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the en- gine.

Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.

Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is fe, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required

Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID A WARNING

e Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.

e Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

When checking or replacement is required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

The specified CVT fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compart- ment

POWER STEERING FLUID WDI0256

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° - 80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera- tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

e Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

BRAKE FLUID For further brake fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

e Use only new fluid from a sealed con- tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehi- cle’s stopping ability.

e Be sure to clean the filler cap before removing.

A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

WINDOW WASHER FLUID LDI0079

BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. IFthe fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake waming light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT. 3 fluid up to the MAX line. H fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDOW WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fillthe window washer fluid reservoir periodicall. Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid waming light comes on (ff so equipped).

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's in- structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of win- dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind- shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti- freeze or equivalent.

e Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the pai

e Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufactur. recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen- trate and water.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Keep the battery surface clean and dry, Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.

e Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

e_lfthe vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

e Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener- ated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce bat- tery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.

+ When working on or near a battery, al- ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.

e Battery posts, terminals and related ac- cessories contain lead and lead com- pounds. Wash hands after handling.

e Keep battery out of the reach of children.

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill.

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING H jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting" in the “In case of emergency" section of this manual. f the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer.

3 1 2 4 WD10226 1. Power steering fluid pump 2. Crankshaft 8. Generator 4. Air conditioner A WARNING Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt(s) for signs of un- usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi- tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”

SPARK PLUGS SD11895|

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Platinum-tipped spark plugs

Itis not necessary to replace platinum-tipped (@&) spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol- low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re- gapping.

e Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

A WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

ACAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re- move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

H replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for assistance.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte- nance Guide." When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth

To remove the air cleaner filter: @ Loosen the screw. @ Disconnect the electrical connector.

@ Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

e Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth- ers to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the stops the flame if the engine backfires. If itisn’tthere, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.

+ Never pour fuel into the throttie body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air- borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The fier is located behind the glove box. Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for change intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-

1. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins. Remove the glove box from the opening and let it hang by the cord.

2. Remove the filter cover from the intake unit NOTE:

by disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bot- The fiter is marked “UP” with an arrow. The tom of the cover. end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle.

3. Slide the filter into the housing.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2 supporting tabs on the housing.

4. Replace the cover by inserting the upper tabs inside the housing slot and pushing the hook tabs until they snap on to the housing lip.

5. Install the glove box door.

Fill out the date information on the small replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna)

CLEANING H your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside ofthe windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind- shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

A CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam- age the windshield and impair driver n.

REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

e After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.

+ Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be dam- aged from wind pressure.

@ Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

@ Push the release tab, then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove.

@® Remove the wiper blade.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

Be careful not to let anything get into the washer nozzle @). This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If something gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

BRAKES I the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

A WARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re- placement, a high pitched scraping or screech- ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa- sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte- nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser- vice and Maintenance Guide”.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Two types offuses are used. Type À is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is used in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com- partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes.

I a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse, the type À fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securel.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under- hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

À CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

I any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the

tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center ofthe fuse block in the passenger compartment.

8-22 Maintenance and do

5. Ifthe fuse is open @), replace it with a new fuse ®).

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

À CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

Type A 4. lf the fuse is open (@), replace it with an equivalent good fuse (®). 5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

BATTERY REPLACEMENT LDI0456

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol- lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli- gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver (@) into the slit (8) of the comer and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva- lent

e Make sure that the + side faces the bot- tom of the case.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement.

Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user’s authority to op- erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb

AWARNING ANHIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on, they pro- duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric Shock, never attempt to modify or disas- semble. Always have your xenon head- lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” in the “instru- ments and controls” section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be- cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your NISSAN dealer.

e Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.

e Only touch the plastic base when han- dling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could sig-

icantly affect bulb life and/or head-

e High pressure halogen gas is sealed le the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.

e Use the same number and wattage as inally installed:

Low beam: Wattage: 55 Bulb no.: 9012*

High beam: Wattage: 55 Bulb no.: 9012*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart- ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. À temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

tem Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

High/low (Halogen) 55 9012

High/low (Xenon) (special) D2s

Tail/Stop/Tum 27/5 8057K Backup (reversing) 13 912

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Rear personal lights

High-mounted stop light (Type A) Trunk light

High-mounted stop light (Type B) .… License plate light

0. Rear combination light

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.

Ÿ Indicates bulb removal

f Indicates bulb installation

Front personal/map lights — Type A Use a cloth ® to protect the housing.

Front personal/map lights — Type B Use a cloth ® to protect the housing.

WDI0340 LDI0341 Vanity mirror light Step light Use a cloth D to protect the housing. Use a cloth ® to protect the housing.

Rear personal light Use a cloth ® to protect the housing.

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

M EDON LDIO397 WD10343

Rear console box light (if so equipped) Trunk light

Squeeze the tabs on the connector. Pull out the bulb.

WDI0344 High-mounted stop light (if so equipped)

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire, see the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit or flashing continuously, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. lf equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not de- tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres- sure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire pressure informa- tion” in the “Display screen, heater, air

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

conditioner and audio and phone sys- tems” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the “Starting and driv- ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long dis- tance trips. The recommended tire pres- sure specifications are shown on the FM.VS.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the "Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:

e Most tires naturally lose air over time.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Ifthe tires are used at speeds above 100 mph (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so (on a race track for example), the cold tire inflation pressure must be increased. Re- fer to "Checking tire pressure” later in this section.

Set the tire pressure to the normal cold tire inflation pressure when the vehicle speed or load is reduced.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un- der inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

e The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)_is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. The vehicle weight capacity is indi- cated on the Tire and Loading Information label (if so

equipped). Do not load your ve- hicle beyond this capacity. Over- loading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operat-

re, or unfavorable han- dling characteristics and could also lead to a serious ident. Loading beyond the specified ca- pacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

e Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

© Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (137 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed rated tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in tire fail- ure, loss of control and possible injury.

e Increase the cold tire inflation pressure as indicated in "Check- ing tire pressure” later in this sec- tion when using the tires speci- fied by NISSAN above 100 MPH (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so (on a race track for example). Failure to increase the cold tire inflation pressure may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. After such use, readjust tire pressure.

e For additional information re- garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Tire and loading information label

® Seating capacity: The maximum num- ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.

@ Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

@ Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recom- mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best bal- ance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's GVWR.

@® Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling” later in this section.

@ Spare tire size (if so equipped).

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Checking tire pressure

Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side- ways, or air will escape. lf the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare to the specifica- tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

High Speed/ Maximum Load Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

240 kPa, 35 PSI P245/45R18 96V |220 kPa, 32 PSI 260 kPa, 38 PSI Rear Original Tire P225/55R17 95V [230 kPa, 33 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSI P245/45R18 96V |220 kPa, 32 PSI 260 kPa, 38 PSI Spare Tire T145/80*17 420 kPa, 60 PSI N/A

*: “R''or “D” depending on tire manufacturer

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information iden- tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro- vides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire P215/65R15 95H speed rating. PB 215 6 BR 15 9% 4H * Li # Li Li # Li 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 WDI0395 Example

@ Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 4. R: The "R" stands for radial. 1. P: The "P' indicates the tire is de- 5. Two-digit number (15): This number

signed for passenger vehicles (not all is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

tires have this information). 6. Two- orthree-digit number (95): This 2. Three-digit number (215): This num- number is the tire's load index. lt is a

ber gives the width in millimeters of measurement of how much weight

the tire from sidewall edge to side- each tire can support. You may not

wall edge. find this information on all tires be- 8. Two-digit number (65): This number, cause it is not required by law.

known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height to width.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

DOT XX XX XXX XXXX DOT XX XX XXX XXX _ XXXX # Li # L Li) Li 1 2 3 4 5 6 WDI0396 Example

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart- ment Of Transportation." The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of Tire Identification Num- ber.

2. Two-digit code: identification mark

8. Two-digit code: Tire size 8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac- ture

6. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For ex- ample, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2008. fthese numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire.

@ Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber- coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur- ers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

@ Maximum permissible inflation pres- sure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible in- flation pressure.

@ Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car- ried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in- stalled tire.

Indicates whether the tire requires an in- ner tube (“tube type") or not (“tubeless”).

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has radial structure.

Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown. Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out- ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES A WARNING

e When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

e For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

n” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod- els to provide good performance all year, includ- ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially re- duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S" on the tire sidewall.

I you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

I snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex- ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

À CAUTION Tire chains/cables should not be installed on P245/45R18 size tires. Installation of the tire chains/cables on P245/45R18 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire chains/cables, you should install P225/55R17 size tires on your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de- signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the pos- sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor- mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer- gency” section of this manual for tire re- placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-Ib (112 N:m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight- ened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

e After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.

e Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

e Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.

e For additional information re- garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

1. Wearindicator 2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

e Tires should be periodically in- spected for wear, cracking, bulg- ing or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.

Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob- vious. Replace the tires as neces- sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in-

jury. If necessary to repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information re- garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

+ Theuse oftires other than those recom- mended or the mixed use of tires of ifferent brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to- tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these ef- fects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

+ If the wheels are changed for any rea- son, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade ve- hicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re- fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Tech cal and consumer information” section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

«+ Replacing tires with those not originally speci by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

e Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

e The use of retread tires ji: recommended.

e For additional information regarding es, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet.

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling andtire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal- anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per- formed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.

e For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- formation Booklet.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

«Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.

+ Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.

e_inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

e NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) (if so equipped)

Obsenve the following precautions if the TEM- PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident

A WARNING The spare tire should be used for emer- gency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first oppor- tunity to avoid possible tire or differen- tial damage.

Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid Sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.

Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front (original) tires.

Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.

Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.

Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.

Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

À CAUTION Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause dam- age to the vehicle.

Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original re, ground clearance is reduced. To damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ..9-2 Fuel recommendation . ee Engine oi and oil filter recommendations... 9-5

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations .… ..9-6 Specifications. .… 9-7 Engine … . 9-7 Wheels and tires . . eee 9-8 Dimensions and weights .….... éerree.. 9-8 When traveling or registeing your vehicle in another country 9-9 Vehicle identification .… 9-9 Vehicle identification number (IN) plate . .9-9 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) … eoneessess esse... 9-9 Engine serial number. . 9-10 FMVS.S/C.M.V.SSS. certification label. 9-10

Emission control information label Tire and loading information label.…

Air conditioner specification label. Installing front license plate Vehicle loading information Terms .… Vehicle load capacity . Loading tips Measurement of weights Towing a trailer... Maximum load limits .…. Towing load/specification Towing safety .…. Flat towing. Uniform tire quality grading Emission control system warranty Reporting safety defects (US only) Readiness for inspection/maintenance (1/M) test Event data recorders. en Owner's Manual/Senvice Manual order information. ...9-27 In the event of a collision

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capaci

(Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure Imp measure Liter Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 756 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) *1 Engine oil *6 Drain and Refil With oi fiter change 4-1/2 at 8-9/4 at 42 + Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2 Without oil filter change _4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 at 40 " Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *2 Cooling system With reservoir 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal 85 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 8

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*7

Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid ‘4 or equivalent DOT 8

CVT fluid Power steering fluid (PSF) Brake fluid

See a NISSAN dealer for service.

Refil to the proper level according to the instructions in the “Maintenance and do-i-yourself section.

Mutti-purpose grease _ _ =

NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant = =

HFC-184a (R-134a) *5

Air conditioning system oil = =

NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *5

Windshield washer fluid _- _-

Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

“1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation." “2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation."

“3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by

the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. “4: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.

“5: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations." “6: For further details, see “Engine Oil'in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section of this manual. “7: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON* II/MERCON", or equivalent ATF may also be used.

9-2 Technical and consumer information

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

FUEL RECOMMENDATION NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre- mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research oc- tane number 96). Ifunleaded premium gasoline is not available you may use unleaded regular gaso- line with an octane rating of at least 87 AK number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.

ACAUTION e Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emi: n

control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

e Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim- ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi- cations where it is available. Many ofthe automo- bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu- lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug- gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy- genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com- patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de- termined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.

H you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.

e The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

e If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should con- tain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.)

e If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro- sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. Atthis time, sufficient data is not av: able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve- hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall- ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu- eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec- tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc) which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se- vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

9-4 Technical and consumer information

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. lf any of the above symptoms are en- countered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light Spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

e Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

e E-85is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

e U.S. government regulations requi ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi: fied by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbrevia- tion or the appropriate percentage for that region.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

API certification mark

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil

His essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. See "Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna- tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis- cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica- ion mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces- sary when the proper oil type is used and main- tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper- ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter, When re- placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil fikter or its équivalent for the reason described in “Change intervals”.

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and fiers. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor- rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war- ranty.

Your engine was filed with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change

Technical and consumer information 9-5

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may require more fréquent oil and filter changes:

+ repeated short distance driving at cold out- side temperatures

stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN A/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva- lents.

9-6 Technical and consumer information

À CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or cause severe damage to the ing system and will req

the replace- ment of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regula- tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys- tem service. À NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger- ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system:

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model VOS5DE Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° Bore x Stroke in (mm) _ 8.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4) Displacement cu in (em°) 218.45 (3,498) Firing order 1-2-8-4-5-6 Idie speed

CVT (in “N° positi in “N' position) No adjustment is necessary.

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

Spark plug DILFR5A1 1 Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) _0.048 (1.1) Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Wheels Overall length in (mm) 194.4 (4,937) 17x71) Overall width in (mm) 71.7 (1,821) 18x7.5)) Overall height in(mm) 58.8 (1,480) Tires Front Track P225/55R17 95V 17 inch tire in (mm) 61.4 (1,560) P245/45R18 96V 18 inch tire in (mm) 61.0 (1,549) Spare tire Rear Track Temporary T145/80*17 17 inch tire in (mm) 61.6 (1,565) Full size 17"or18" 18 inch tire in (mm) 61.2 (1,554) Speed rating 17 H Wheelbase in (mm) 111.2 (2,824) 18" V Gross vehicle weight Ib (kg) See the “FMV.S.S/CM. :“R" or “D” depending on tire manufacturer rating V.SS. certification label” Gross axle weight rating on the center pillar be- Front Ib (kg)_tween the drivers side Rear 1 (kg) ont and rear doors.

9-8 Technical and consumer information

01/26/07 —arosenma =1

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna)

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve- hicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi- cle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. Al gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There- fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis- sion control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; there- fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an- other country, state, province or district cations, transpor- tation, and registration are the responsibi ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION WTI0171

(VIN) PLATE The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identifica- tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-9

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

aa) [7 = = WTI0049 WTI0172)| WTI0173]

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER EMVS.S./C.M.VSS. EMISSION CONTROL CERTIFICATION LABEL INFORMATION LABEL The number is stamped on the engine as shown. The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety The emission control information label is at- Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la- tached to the underside of the hood as shown. bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu- able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

9-10 Technical and consumer information

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-11

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

9-12 Technical and consumer information

Use the following steps to mount the front license plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the plastic bag

e_ License plate bracket e_ License plate bracket screws x 2 e_ License plate screws x 2

1. Make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia at the location marks (small dimples) using a 0.89 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the area behind the fascia, apply only light pres- sure to the dhill

2. Insert the grommets into the holes in the bumper fascia.

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the grommet hole to turn the threaded part of the grommet 90°.

4. Mount the license plate bracket using the two longer screws.

5. Use the two shorter hex head screws to mount the license plate to the license plate bracket.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

e Itis extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- ously injured or killed.

e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

© Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, flu- ids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not in- clude passengers and cargo.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas- sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is lo- cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.SsS. label.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This informa- tion is located on the EM.V.S.S./C.M.V.SsS. label.

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the ve- hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be in- cluded as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label (if so equipped).

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your ve- hicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load- ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu- pants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the follow- ing illustration.

Technical and consumer information 9-13

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Steps for determining correct load

should never exceed XXX kg or

driver and passengers from XXX kg

able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs) or 300 kg.)

[[ Occupants Luggage Trailer Tongue Load limit Ee Remaining available 1. Locate the statement “The combined 1,4001b | — R R + FF] + [LL] |— ser and luggage weight of occupants and cargo (640 kg) load capacity =

1501bx2=3001b 301bx2=60Ib 300 740 lb XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard. KG0ke) (135k9) (4ka) G7Ka) (H85ka) | (36 kg) 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be

Fr Occupants Luggage N riding in your vehicle. Load limit Remaining available 8. Subtract the combined weight of the 14001 |— R R + ET] cargo and luggage (640 kg) load capacity = or XXX lbs.

150 Ib x 2 = 300 Ib 30 Ib x2=601b 1,040 lb . . (GK (135 ko) ak G7kD | GT2ke) 4. The resulting figure equals the avail- Occupants Luggage à Load limit Remaining available (640 kg) load capacity = 150 Ib x 5 = 750 Ib 30 Ib x 5 = 150 Ib 500 lb 640-340 (5 X 70) = ([ Gokg) (840k9) Gakg) (GOkd ) (227k9) ( { ) LTIO182 Example

9-14 Technical and consumer information

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be trans- ferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this re- duces the available cargo and lug- gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. See “Measurement of Weights” later in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres- sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa- tion label.

e The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the FMVS.S./CMVS.S. certification label.

e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat- backs. In a sudden stop or colli- sion, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRSs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could oc- cur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause per- sonal injury.

e Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak- ing distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not

covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not ex- ceed either of the gross axle weight rat- ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or re- move items to bring all weights below the ratings.

Technical and consumer information 9-15

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

TOWING A TRAILER A WARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and perfor- mance and may lead to accidents.

e Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

e Forthe first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri- marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing à trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak- ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at wwwnissanusa.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing ca- pability and the special equipment required for proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the “Towing Load/Specification" chart found later in this sec- tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) equals the combined weight ofthe towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could ad- versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per- formance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro- priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

9-16 Technical and consumer information

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Temperature conditions also can affect towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The trans- mission high fluid temperature protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of transmission damage, could activate and automatically de- crease engine power. Under some conditions, engine and vehicle speed could be reduced. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather, and road conditions.

A WARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and lower vehicle speed. Also, when the high temperature mode oper- ates, engine and vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. On highways, the re- duced speed may be lower than other traf- fic which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driv- ing. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the engine to cool or the transmission to return to normal operation.

À CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties.

Total trailer load Tongue load

Keep the tongue load between 10-15 percent of the total trailer load within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. I the tongue load be- comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load

Technical and consumer information 9-17

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

T11012M Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the FM.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Ale Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the F.MV.S.S/C.MV.S.S. certification label.

9-18 Technical and consumer information

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck Stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for tongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on EMVS.S./C.M.V.SsS. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail- able maximum tongue load.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Ade Weight are not more than Front Gross Axe Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the FMV.S.S/C.MVSS. certification label. The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat- ings.

on ascale - including passengers, cargo and hitch - 4,446 Ib. (2016 kg).

e Maximum Towing Load from “Towing Load/Specification" chart - 1,000 JIb. (454 kg).

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

4,546 lb. (2062 kg) — 4,446 Ib. (2016 kg)

GVWR GVW Available for tongue weight

1,000 Ib. (454 kg) Capacity available for

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passen- ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be- tween 10 - 15% ofthe trailer weight. the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the 10 - 15% tongue weight specification even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. Ifthe calculated tongue weight is less than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION UNIT: Ib (kg) MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD 1,000 (454) MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 100 (45) TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. À genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve- hicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

r hitch components have sp: weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca- pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal damage.

Choose a hitch ball ofthe proper size and weight rating for your trailer:

e_ The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball

e_ The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut.

Technical and consumer information 9-19

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground.

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han- diing. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer's brake sys- tem. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device.

Class | trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 Ib (909 kg).

You may add Class | trailer hitch equipment that has a 2,000 Ib (909 kg) maximum weight rating to the vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable of

towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load/Specification Chart earlier in this section.

A CAUTION Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact- absorbing bumper.

e Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys- tem, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch.

To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the receiver when not in use.

e After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment.

Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit tuning corners.

9-20 Technical and consumer information

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

À CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available power- type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more that 15 mps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys- tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob- tain the proper equipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu- table trailer dealer.

I your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

A WARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di- rectly to the vehicle brake system.

e Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, wo suspension or other possible causes of either condition.

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve- hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

e Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

In order to gain skil and an understanding of the vehicle's behavior, you should practice tuming, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor- mance will. be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions.

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving

e Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowiy. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so:

À CAUTION If you move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occu:

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab- sorb the vehicle load!

4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Shift the transmission into P (Park). 6. Turn off the engine. To drive away: 1. Start the vehicle. 9-22 Technical and consumer information

… Apply and hold the brake pedal. Shift the transmission into gear. . Release the parking brake.

. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are

clear from the blocks.

. Apply and hold the brake pedal. … Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When going up a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine over- loading and/or overheating.

H the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioner system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position.

Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances.

Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle's first 500 miles (805 km)

For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

e_ When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal tuming radius during the turn.

© Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus- ing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve- hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the ve- hicle

— Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently applythe brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal- anced as described earlier in this section.

Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires con- siderably more distance than normal pass- ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes.

Down shift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes.

To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use overdrive.

Avoïd holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.

Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually

Do not use cruise control while towing a trailer.

e Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

e_ Check your hitch, trailer wiring hamess con- nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

When launching a boat, don't allow the wa- ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper.

When towing a trailer, transmission fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section earlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

e Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.

+ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- ways tow forward, never backward.

+ DO NOT tow any automatic transmis- sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

«+ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac- turer's recommendations when using their prod- uct.

Technical and consumer information 9-23

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, À, B and C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, À, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- sured under controlled conditions on specified govemment test surfaces of asphalt and con- crete. À tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

9-24 Technical and consumer information

A WARNING The traction grade assigned to this based on straight-ahead braking tra tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charactei

Temperature À, B and C The temperature grades are À (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces- sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor- mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

A WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, ther separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:

For USA 1. Emission Defects Warranty 2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor- mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa- tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re- placement by writing to:

+ Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.0. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada Emission Control System Warranty

e_ Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, LAW 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)

If you believe that your vehicle has a de- fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immedi- ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi- tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be- come involved in individual problems be- tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve- hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 827-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (1/M) TEST Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re- quired to be in what is called the “ready condi- tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

H a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the UM test check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condi- tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the l/M test condition is not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is "ready." If the ML indicates the vehicle is in a "not ready" con- dition, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

Technical and consumer information 9-25

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

A WARNING Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic con- ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. Al- low the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H (normal oper- ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator

pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 min- utes.

9-26 Technical and consumer information

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se- lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

H steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept- able between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of computers that monitor and control a num- ber of systems to optimize performance and help service technicians with diagno- sis and repair. Some of the computers monitor emission control systems, braking systems, engine systems, transmission systems, tire pressure systems, and airbag systems. Some data about vehicle opera- tion may be stored in the computers for use during servicing. Other data may be stored if a crash event occurs. For example, ve- hicle speed, brake application, steering angle, air bag readiness, air bag perfor- mance, and seat belt use by the driver or passenger may be recorded. These types of Systems are sometimes called Event Data Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to access the electronic data that may be stored in the vehicle’s computers (sounds are not recorded). NISSAN and NISSAN dealers have equipment to access some of this data; others may also have this equipment. The data may be retrieved during routine vehicle servicing or for special research. It might also be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee, in response to a request by law enforcement, or as other- wise required or permitted by law.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro- cedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner's Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact:

Tweddie Litho Company 1-800-450-9491 www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact

Resolve Corporation 20770 Westwood Drive Strongsville, OH 44149 1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner’'s Manuals for this model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation 20770 Westwood Drive Strongsville, OH 44149 1-800-247-5321

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser- vice Manual or Owner's Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num- ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800- 887-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa- tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Ovwner's Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF À COLLISION Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts: made to NISSAN's original exacting specifica- tions — if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN's warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro- tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un- necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the Windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non- genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of- ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Technical and consumer information 9-27

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authoriz- ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro- tect you, so you can take action to protect your- self.

If you should need further information visit us at: anusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).

9-28 Technical and consumer information

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Active Head Restraint . .. Air bag (See supplemental restraint System) 1-87 Air bag system Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . Air bag warning light. . Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . Air conditioner Air conditioner service . . . Air conditioner specification label . . . . Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . Servicing air conditioner . . . Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . Anchor point locations . . . . . . Antenna Anti-lock brake warning light. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). Armrests Audible reminders. . Audio system . . . . . Compact Disc (CD) changer . a 33, 4-39 Compact disc (CD) player . 4-32 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

changer. 4-29, 4-36 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player 4-29

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . 4-42 Autolight switch. . 2-22 Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . Automatic power window switch. Transmission selector lever lock release. . . AUX jack . Average speed

Back button. . Battery Charge warning light . Before starting the engine Belt (See drive bell) . . . . Block heater Engine. Bluetooth® hands-free phone system . Booster seats . . Brake Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). - Brake fluid... Brake light (See stop light). Brake system . . ... . Brake waming light . . Brake wear indicators . Parking brake operation Self-adjusting brakes. .

Brakes Lee. 8- Break-in schedule. . . . Brightness control Instrument panel . . Brightness/contrast button Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .. Bulb replacement. . 1

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . Car phone or CB radio. ... Cargo (See vehicle loading information) : CD care and cleaning CD changer (See audio system) . . . .4-: CD player (See audio system). . . Child restraint with top tether strap Child restraints. . . . .. 1-12, 1-1

Precautions on child

restraints. . 1-18, 1-26, 1-33

Top tether strap anchor point locations . . Child safety rear door lock. . . . ce Chimes, audible reminders. . . . . Cleaning exterior and interior . Clock

(models with navigation system). . . . .

(models without navigation system. : Clock set « C.MVSS. certification label. . . . Cold weather driving . 4

Compact disc (CD) player. . 4-82

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . .5-9 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid 8-11 Driving with Continuously Variable

Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/ubricants. . . .. .. Changing engine coolant Checking engine coolant level. Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . 2-5

Corrosion protection

Cup holders. D Daytime running light system (Canada only). 2-24 10-2

Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch

Dimensions and weights

Dimmer switch for instrument panel. . . . . 2-25 Display controls

(see control panel buttons). . . . 4-2, 4-6 Distance to empty. . . .

Door locks Door open warning. Door open warning light Drive belt Drive positioner, Automatic. Driving Cold weather driving . 5-23 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) 4 Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Economy - fuel Emission control information label... Emission control system warranty . . . . Engine Before starting the engine . . . . Block heater. Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . Changing engine coolant . . . Changing engine oil... . . . . Changing engine oil filter

Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7 Checking engine oil level . . .. 8-8 Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge Engine cooling system .

Engine oil... Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation . -9-5 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . 2-11

Engine oil viscosity Engine serial number . . . Engine specifications. Starting the engine. .

English/metric setting. . . . ..

Event data recorders . . . .

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)

Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . Front seats 1-2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. Fuel economy Fuel gauge . Fuel octane rating . . . Fuel recommendation . Fuel-filler door and cap. . . . Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. Fuel economy setting Fuses Fusible links . . .

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . Hazard warning flasher switch... . Head restraints .

Active Head Restraint . . . . .. Headlight and turn signal switch. . Headlight control switch Headlights. . Heated seats . Heated steering wheel . Heater

Heater operation HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . Hood release Hom 2-27

Ignition switch Immobilizer system. . . 2-18, 3-3, 5-7 Important vehicle information label. In-cabin microfilter . . increasing fuel economy . . Indicator lights and audible reminders (See waming/indicator lights and audible reminders). . Instrument brightness control Instrument panel Instrument panel dimmer switch Intelligent Key system . Key operating range . Key operation. . Mechanical key .

Remote keyless entry operation . . . . . 3-12 Troubleshooting guide . . Warning signals. . . . . Interior light . . . . Interior trunk lid release. . . . . ISOFIX child restraints . . . . .

3 Jump starting . 6-7 K Keyfob battery replacement . . 8-24

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

License plate Installing the license plate .

Light Air bag warning light. . . Brake light (See stop light). . Bulb check/nstrument panel . Bulb replacement. . . . ... Charge warning light . . . . . Cornering light. Fog light switch .

Headlight and turn signal switch. 2-21 Headlight control switch . 2-22 Headlights. . 8-25 Interior light . 2-42 Light bulbs. 8-25 Low tire pressure warning light . 22-11 Low washer fluid warning light 2-12 Passenger air bag and status light. 1-46 Personal lights ....2-48 Trunk light. 2-44 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . 2-9

Lock Child safety rear door lock. . 3-6

Door locks Fuel-fller door lock opener lever. Glove box lock Power door locks Trunk lid lock opener lever . .

Low fuel warning light

Low tire pressure warning light .

Low washer fluid warning light

Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

Maintenance Changing the maintenance interval . . . . . 49 Displaying the maintenance notice reminder

Maintenance precautions . . .. Outside the vehicle. . . Resetting the maintenance interval . Seat belt maintenance . Setting Under the hood and vehicle . . Malfunction indicator light . Manual front seat adjustment . . . . Map pocket . Meters and gauges. Instrument brightness control . . Mirror Outside mirror control. Outside mirrors . Vanity mirror...

N NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 2-18, 8-8, 5-7 o Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4 Odometer 2-4

Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/ubricants. . . .. . Changing engine oil .…. Changing engine oil filter. Checking engine oil level. Engine oi Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .. Engine oil viscosity .

Outside mirror control . . .

Overheat I your vehicle overheats .

Owners manual order form . .

Owners manual/service manual order

information. . 9-27

Parking Parking brake operation .… Parking/parking on hills.

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Precautions on child

restraints. . 1-18, 1-26, 1-33 Precautions on seat belt usage . . .... 1-10 Precautions on supplemental restraint system. 1-87 Precautions when starting and driving .…. 5-2 Programmable features . . . 4-5, 4-11 Push starting . 6-9 R Radio Car phone or CB radio. . ... 4-48 Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . 4-33, 4-39

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) changer. 4-29, 4-36 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player 4-29 Steering wheel audio control switch... 4-42 Readiness for inspection maintenance (1/M) test. 9-25 Rear power windows Rear seat

Rear sonar system . 5-22 Rear sonar system off switch . ....2-29 Rear sun shade . . 2-41 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch 2-20 Recorders

Event data. 9-26 Refrigerant recommendation . . 9-6

Registering your vehicle in another country. . 9-9 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .. 9-25 Resetting average speed . . Resetting the fuel economy . . .

Resetting trip 1 and tip 2 4 4-8 Resetting trip time . 4 4-4 s

Safety Child safety rear door lock. . . ..3-6 Child seat belts . . . . .. . . 1-18, 1-26, 1-33 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-25 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . 1-2 Front power seat adjustment . 1-4

Seat belt Child safety Infants and small children Injured Person. . . Larger children . . Precautions on seat belt usage . . . Pregnant women . . Seat belt extenders . Seat belt maintenance . Seat belts Shoulder beit height adjustment. Three-point type with retractor. . .

Seat belt warning light

Seatback pockets. . .

Seats Adjustment Automatic drive positioner Front seats

Self-adjusting brakes. . . . . . Service manual order form . .…. Senvicing air conditioner . . . . Setting button . . Shift lock release .

Shifting Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .…. Lureeceeeecee 5-10 Shoulder belt height adjustment. . . . .... 1-16

Sonar Rear system . Spark plug replacement . . .…. Speedometer SRS warning label . Starting Before starting the engine Jump starting . Precautions when starting and driving Push starting . Starting the engine. . Startup screen . . Steering Heated steering wheel . Power steering fluid. . . . . Power steering system . . . Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . . 4-42 Stop light . . Storage . .. Sun visors . . Sunglasses case . Sunglasses holder Sunroof Supplemental air bag warning light. . 1-52, 2-13

Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-44 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels. . . . . . . 1-51 10-5

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system. 1-87 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system). . . . 1-37 Switch Autolight switch ....2-22 Automatic power window switch. 2-38 Fog light switch... 2-25 Hazard warning flasher switch 2-26 Headlight and turn signal switch. 2-21 Headlight control switch . 2-22

Ignition switch... . Power door lock switch.

Rear sonar system off switch . 2-29 Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch. . . 2-20 Traction control system (TCS) off

switch 2-28 Turn signal switch 2-95

T Tachometer . 2-4 Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . 2-5 Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start. 2-18, 8-8, 5-7 Three-way catalyst . . 4 5-2 Tire

Flat tire A Spare tire.

Tire placard . . ... Tire pressure . . . . Tire rotation . . . . . Types of tires . . . Uniform tire quality grading. Wheels and tires . . Wheel/tire size .

Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . .

Tire pressure display . . . . .

Top tether strap child restraint. . . . . .

Towing Flat towing. . . ... Tow truck towing .… Towing load/specification Trailer towing .

Traction control system (TCS) off switch

Transceiver HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . 2-44

Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . Selector lever lock release

Travel (See registering your vehicle in another

Trip button. Trip odometer. 2-4 Trip time. 44 Trunk access through the rear seat . 1-6

Trunk lid lock opener lever Trunk light... Tu signal switch. . . .

U Uniform tire quality grading. . . .. 9-24

Vanity mirror Vehicle dimensions and weights

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-29 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-21 Vehicle electronic system . 4-18 Vehicle identification . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number). Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate Vehicle loading information. .…. Vehicle recovery. . Vehicle security system. . . Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-

lizer system), engine start . . . .. . 2-18, 3-3, 5-7 Visors 3-24

Air bag warning light. Anti-lock brake warning light Battery charge warning light Brake warning light... . . .

Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . 2-11 Hazard warning flasher switch . Low fuel warning light...

Low tire pressure warning light . Low washer fluid warning light. .… Passenger air bag and status light. Seat belt warning light Vehicle security system. Warning labels (for SRS) Wauning/indicstor ghts and audible reminders .

Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch . . 2-19

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country. . . ... Le

Window washer fluid...

Windows Locking passengers windows. . Power rear windows . Power windows. . . . Rear power windows .

Windshield wiper and washer switch -

Wiper Windshicid viper and washor switch . 2-1 Wiper blades

MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL:

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre- mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research oc- tane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.

A CAUTION e Using a fuel other than that sp. could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

e Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components an not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim- ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical and consumer information” section.

See “Engine oil and oi filter recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE: See tire placard

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE" information found in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Follow these recommendations for the future re- liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Engine coolant 8-7 Window washer fluid 8-12 Engine oil 8-8

Passenger supplemental front impact air bag 1-37

Audio system 4-22; Air conditioner 4-19 Supplemental side-impact air bag 1-87 Front seats 1-2

Fuel-filler door release 3-20; Fuel recom- mendation 9-3

Keys 8-2 Seat belts 1-10 Trunk release 8-18

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag 1-37

Driver supplemental front impact air bag 1-37

Hood release 3-18 Meters and gauges 2-3

[7 REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA_ English (nna) 01/26/07 —arosenma =1